高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)（整理20篇）由网友“ivy2009”投稿提供，下面是小编收集整理的高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)，供大家参考借鉴，欢迎大家分享。

篇1：高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Dear Smith,

I know you want to find a job in Beijing. I read an advertisement in today’s “21st Century ”, an English paper here. Beijing Ladder Information Company is running a school. So they need native - speaker English teachers. What they prefer is a university degree in education or other related fields,which you have. And a foreign expert certification is also required. I think you are the right person they want.

If you are interested please directly call or write to the company. The telephone number is 86-10-68019433, and their E-mail address is : liecbj @ hotmail. com

Good luck.

Your’s

Li Hua

习作2:

Comment:

Mary is a clever girl with good manners. She is always ready to help others and therefore gets along very well with her classmates.

Having a special interest in Chinese, she speaks it very well. Mary is also good at maths and does a lot of exercises every day. She enjoys doing experiments in chemistry labs ,but sometimes she needs to be more careful. In all the subjects , physics is the most favorite one to her and she is one of the best in this subject. She always tries her best to make better progress and things better.

All the teachers like her very much.

Signature: Wang Ming

篇2：高三第二轮复习---基础写作（广东）(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Dear Joan,

I read a notice on the Internet yesterday that you wanted to look for a Chinese friend on the Internet to help you learn Chinese language, culture and customs. I’m very glad to become your friend on the Internet but I don’t know whether you would like to accept me. If I’m able to become your friend on the Internet, I’ll try my best to help you with Chinese in my spare time. I’ll introduce some cultures and customs of China to you step by step. I expect that you’ll tell me your QQ number and make good friends soon.

Yours,

Zhang Hua

篇3：高三第二轮复习---基础写作（广东）(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Be careful with Your Behavior

In order to improve hygiene in the dining hall, Huaxing School has decided to carry out the activity - “Love the Dining Hall”. Students are called on to buy food that they can eat up. The waste of the food should be poured into the dustbin. What’s more, school will keep students on duty and students should do the cleaning on time. In addition, the lectures on hygiene will be held and students are welcome there to develop a good habit.

篇4：高三第二轮复习---基础写作（广东）(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Nowadays video games are popular with many people, especially with students. Some students are interested in playing video games because they think the games can relax themselves after the long hard work, but I think they do much harm to both students’ mind and body. What’ more, playing video games usually occupies the students’ precious time and will eventually affect their study. Finally, it’s also a waste of time and content of the games which is sometimes not suitable for students will have side effects on their growth.

In short, playing video games has a lot of disadvantages, and we can’t play them too often, though it is a good means of entertainment.

篇5：高三第二轮复习---基础写作（广东）(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Zhang Ge Zhuang Primary School

The village of Zhang Ge Zhuang is far away from the others. So children had to a long way for school, for there was no school of their own in the past.

It was not until 1988 that Zhang Ge Zhuang primary school was set up. Now there are 3 teachers, 48 pupils and 5 classes in the school. Children have 6 subjects - Chinese, Maths, Science, Music, Drawing and P.E. and education is free for all children in the village.

基础写作补充材料

应用文-----日记

一、锦囊妙计

日记和上期所谈的书信一样都是在日常生活中经常遇见的说明文的体裁，这主要是此类题贴近学生生活，题材学生熟悉，所涉及内容都是同学们在日常生活中必不可少的活动，同时也是新课标的要求，因此，同学们在备考复习中应清楚这是应该掌握的内容之一。首先我从宏观上对考试中的应用文写作给予学生们一点提示，然后就日记这种常见的考试题材，予以精辟的点拨。应用文通常应注意以下几个问题：

（1）一定要看清题目要求，把题中要求的信息点全部渗透到文章中去。

（2）要用自己熟悉的句型结构和词语；同时词及词组的选用“质量要高，要精辟”。

（3）因时间所限，因此要快速合并或拆分信息点，列出提纲。条理要清楚，文章要一气呵成。

（4）最后注意文章的流畅及连贯性，检查是否熟练并且准确地运用了曾经所学的英语语法及句法知识。

日记作为应用文常见的一种体裁，它是把自己在当天生活中经历的有意义的事以及见闻感受记录下来的书面形式。在新的考试模式下，格式通常不要求考生写出或已经给出。日记可分为记事、议论、描写及抒情等。记事型是用英语记述当天自己生活学习中发生的事情。议论型是对生活中的某一事情或情况现象谈自己的看法，发表议论。描写型或抒情型，则是对某人或某事物的特征做细致的描述，或针对某事物抒发自己的感情。日记除了遵守一般作文的要求外，还应注意以下几个问题：

1）注意日记的格式。应用第一人称来写。

2）多数句子为过去时，因为事情发生在过去；但当记述天气、描写景色或展望未来时，可以用一般现在时或一般将来时。

3）日记必须囊括所有的信息点。

4）语言要通顺、简练，表达要清楚、准确。

二、语法、句法高分tips

由于日记题材文体自由，不拘一格，所以它所涉及的内容极为广泛，同学们发挥的空间比较大，同时对学生在词法与句法的灵活运用及正确运用上也是一个挑战，笔者只就曾涉及到过的一些日记体裁的文章，适当点拨并重新温习一下我们曾学习过的十个较好的常用的“经典句型及句式”。

1. no sooner…than…= hardly/scarcely…when… 一…就, 刚刚…就 (尽量把no sooner, hardly, scarcely 放句首, 句子倒装。如：

Hardly had I gone to the bus stop when it began to rain.

No sooner had we arrived at the supermarket than our kid started to cry for home.

2. not ….until 的强调句型 如：

It wasn’t until his mother came back that he went to bed.

It wasn’t until all the fish died in the river that the villagers realized how serious the pollution was.

3. It was(not) / It will (not) be + 一段时间 + before… 过了多久才……(不久,就…) 如:

It wasn’t long before he realized his mistakes.

It was many days before the people found him in the forest.

4. It is (has been ) +一段时间 + since + 过去时 自从… 到现在…如:

It has been two years since he left China. = He has been away for two years.

It is 8 years since I graduated from university. = I graduated from university 8 years ago.

5. used to do ...过去常常…; be used to doing习惯于… 如:

There used to be a small shop around the street corner.

I have been used to living on campus.

6. the more… the more… 越… 越… 如:

The more you read, the better you understand.

The higher up you go, the colder it will become.

7. as /so long as 只要…… 如:

So long as you keep on trying, you will surely succeed.

As long as you stick to your plans, you will make great progress soon.

8. not only…, but also…/ so… that… /only+ 状语倒装句型 如:

Not only can he speak French, but also he has a good command of English.

So fast did he run that we could hardly follow him.

Only when the mother came back, did she stop crying.

9. unless 除非, 如果不( = if … not) 如:

I won’t attend his party unless he comes to invite me in person.

I shall keep my promise unless something unexpected happens.

10. with 独立主格结构; 作定语或状语,(注意此句型的灵活应用) 如:

China is a great country with a long history.

The teacher came in with a book in his hand.

With the Olympic Games to be held, China is getting ready for them.

With his glasses broken, he couldn’t see the words on the blackboard clearly.

三、实战演练

1. 请以下列内容为题，写一篇日记。 3 月 15 日，星期一。提示：

今晚，你去参加朋友的生日宴会，大家又唱又跳，玩得很开心。刚刚离开朋友家，天开始下雨, 只好在楼下躲雨。一辆摩托车急驰而过，在十字路口撞倒了一个男孩。摩托车没停，逃跑了。你十分气愤，记下了车号（GH - 2375）后马上打电话报警，并把孩子送往医院。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

March 15th， Monday

.

2. [试题分析]

体裁 日记

类别 记事的文章

时态 过去时

内容及

写作

建议

我们把信息点总结为（1）你去参加朋友的生日宴会 （2）在楼下躲雨。（3）一辆摩托车撞倒了一个男孩。（4）摩托车没停，逃跑了。（5）你记下了车号（GH - 2375）后马上打电话报警，并把孩子送往医院。

根据以上信息点我们可以按照事件发生的时间顺序写文章。同时，适当灵活运用一些句式，如：no sooner… than…; so … that …; 同时可运用复合句及其定语从句，使文章顺畅，连贯。

3. [参考范文]

March 15th， Monday

This evening I had a great time at my friend’s birthday party where we sang and danced together happily. Unluckily no sooner had I left my friend’s home than it began to rain heavily, so I had to wait downstairs until the rain stopped. While I was waiting, a motorbike ran by me very fast and hit a boy at the crossing. It was hardly believed that the motorbike ran away without stop. So angry did I feel that I telephoned the police at once because I had written down its number: GH-2375, after which I sent the boy to the hospital.

4.[范文点评]

1．本文用了一些连接词，使文章脉络清晰，逻辑关系流畅。如：where; no sooner… than;

until…; while; so… that…; because…; after which…

2. 恰当应用主语从句，表达情景 It was hardly believed that….

3. 不是照翻原文，而是活学活用，如副词unluckily，使文章读起来很自然，语言精练。

四、举一反三

[习作1]

假如你是王亮，星期一放学后搭公车回家，目睹以下情景；

1． 一位年轻妇女坐在车门附近，她的宠物狗违反公交规章也占了个座位。

2． 中途一个老人，拄着拐杖，上了车。

3． 妇女并没有把狗抱开让座。

4． 其他乘客很生气，你把座位让给老人。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式及开头已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

March 12th， Monday

Today I witnessed an unbelievable incident when I took a bus home.

.

【试题答案1】

March 12th， Monday

Today I witnessed an unbelievable incident when I took a bus home. On the bus, a woman was sitting near the bus door with a dog occupying one seat next to her, which broke the bus regulations obviously. When the bus stopped, an old woman got on the bus with a stick in her hand. To our surprise, neither did the woman give up her seat to the old, nor did she move her dog away from the seat. Seeing this, all the passengers were angry including me. Eventually I asked the old woman to take my seat.

[习作2]

假如你是李明，今天,在学校礼堂举行了开学典礼。写一篇日记，记录学校开学典礼的情况；内容如下：

1. 全体教师、学生出席,部分科学家和官员也参加。

2. 校长在讲话中希望全体师生在新的学期中再接再厉取得更大进步。

3. 并奖励三好学生，同时宣布部分同学在各种竞赛中获奖为学校争光。。

4. 著名科学家讲话,他讲述了自己的学习经验及科研成功的经验.他的讲话使我深受感动。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式及开头已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

March 1st Thursday Fine

Today our school had an opening ceremony in the school auditorium. _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ .

【试题答案2】

March 1st 2007 Thursday Fine

Today our school had an opening ceremony in the school auditorium. All the teachers and students as well as some famous scientists and government officials attended the ceremony. Our principal made a speech, in which he hopes everybody in our school will make greatest efforts and make even more progress in the new term. At the ceremony, “three-good-deed” students were rewarded with prizes and Principal also announced that some honour students had won medals in various competitions, which is the pride of our school. Eventually a famous scientist told the students about his learning experience and how he achieves success in his research work. So moved was I by what he said that I made up my mind to learn from him and study harder in the new term.

[习作3]

假如你是李明，昨天与同学外出野餐，按计划要爬广州白云山; 根据以下内容写一篇日记,内容如下;

1．早上在校门口集合7点出发。

2．不久下小雨，一小时后到达山脚。

3．雨停，爬上山顶，领略美景。

4．照相，唱歌，做游戏，下棋，玩得开心。

5．午餐后下山，4点回家。筋疲力尽。

6．时间3月20日，星期三。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式及开头已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

March 20th Wednesday Cloudy

Yesterday my classmates and I planned to climb the Baiyun Mountain.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

【试题答案3】

March 20th Wednesday Cloudy

Yesterday my classmates and I planned to climb the Baiyun Mountain. Early in the morning all of us gathered at the gate of our school and we started off at seven but soon it began to have a little rain. It was about one hours’ ride before we reached the foot of the mountain. It wasn’t until the rain stopped that we began to climb. After we reached the top of the mountain, we enjoyed the beautiful view from the top and we also held various activities, such as singing, playing chess, playing games, taking the pictures on the top of the mountain. After lunch we went down the mountain and we arrived home at four, all exhausted.

[习作4]

九月十日（星期日）是教师节。上午你参加了学校举行的庆祝会。庆祝会上有几位三十年以上教龄的老师得到了奖章。你的英语教师刘老师也是其中之一。晚饭后，你和几位同学一起去看望李老师。李老师表示要将自己的有生之年献给教育事业，并鼓励你们努力学习。你深受鼓舞，决心将来也当一名像李老师那样的教师。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式和开头已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

Sunday, Sept. 10 Fine

Today is Teachers’ Day.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.

【试题答案4】

Sunday, Sept. 10 Fine

Today is Teachers’ Day. In the morning, I attended the school celebration, at which several teachers were given medals for having completed 30 years of teaching, including my English teacher, Teacher Liu. After supper my classmates and I went to see Mr. Li. He said that he would devote the rest of his life to the cause of education. He also encouraged us to work hard at our lessons. I was greatly inspired by what he said and made up my mind to be a teacher like Mr. Li when I grow up.

[习作5]

根据下列提示写一则日记。

假如你是李明，星期五下午上课时你思想老是开小差，因为你总想着晚上7点要去看影片“飘”。在放学回家的路上，你遇到了一个迷了路的孩子，设法把他送回了家。你虽然没有看上电影但心里却很高兴。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一篇日记，日记的格式和开头已经给出。

2）介绍必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

Friday April 26 Windy

Friday again. How time flies! Another week has gone.

.

【试题答案5】

Friday, April 26 Windy

Friday again. How time flies! Another week has gone. This afternoon, I was often absent-minded in class, for I was thinking of the film “Gone with the wind”, which would be shown at 7 p.m. As soon as class was over, I hurried out of the classroom. On the way home I saw a little child standing by the roadside crying, who had lost his way. Forgetting all about the film, I went up to him and asked him to tell me whatever he knew about his family .It took me nearly an hour to send him home and I missed the film, but I felt happy.

建议，议论

实战演练及解析

1.[抛砖引玉]

广州市政府1月16日，通过了在广州市中山大道（从天河到下远段）建一条公交快车道的决议，这将使天河至岗顶的车速提高三倍，并且公交快车系统的23条线路将在亚运会前全市采用，这个决议在广州市民中产生强大的反响。请根据以下提示，就其利弊谈谈自己的观点。

好处：

1． 体现对普通乘客的关心。

2． 大大提高了公交车的速度，节省了时间。

3． 有利于发展公交事业，减少污染。

弊端：

1． 浪费更多的人力去管理。

2． 下车后不得不穿过机动车道，人行道。

[写作内容]

1）请根据以上提示，就其利弊谈谈自己的观点，文章的开头已经给出。

2）文章必须包括所有提示要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

参考词汇：公交快车系统 the bus rapid transit system (BRT system)

According to the Guangzhou government Office, the bus rapid transit (BRT) system will be piloted on Zhongshan Road (from Tianhe intersection to Xiayuan Section) this year. The BRT system will be adopted throughout the city before the 2010 Asian Games, said Mayor Zhang Guangning. __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.

2. [试题分析]

此题为议论文，从文中提示来看，我们必须从利弊两方面论述，符合对立观点的题型。所以文章条理一定要清晰，论点简明扼要的提出，论据要表达完整。可以选择一些表示对比，转折的连词及句型。时态很明显要用现在时。

3.[参考范文]

According to the Guangzhou government Office, the bus rapid transit (BRT) system will be piloted on Zhongshan Road (from Tianhe intersection to Xiayuan Section) this year. The BRT system will be adopted throughout the city before the 2010 Asian Games, said Mayor Zhang Guangning. Many people hold the opinion that the advantage of BRT system far outweighs the disadvantages, because it shows concern for common passengers. What’s more, the performance of BRT system will surely speed up the ride and save much time. Last but not least, it will definitely bring about a great advance of public buses and also reduces air pollution. However, some people hold the opposite opinion that BRT system may give rise to a lot of problems, such as more people needed to manage the traffic. What’s worse, it is inconvenient for people to cross motor and bicycle lanes when getting off the buses.

4. [范文点评]

1）文中恰当地运用了转折，并列的连词，副词，上下衔接自然，如：what’s more；last but not least; however; what’s worse…

2）多种句型表达方式，同位语从句；原因状语从句；形式主语句式等… 如：…hold the opinion (opposite opinion) that…; it is convenient for people to ….

3）文章观点主题句与论据分类清晰，层次分明。如：Many people hold the opinion that the advantage of BRT system far outweighs the disadvantages…… However, some people hold the opposite opinion that BRT system may give rise to a lot of problems,(观点主题句)

记叙文

一、记叙文是以写人，叙事为主要内容，同时以叙事和描写为主要的表达方式的文章。写记叙文，一定要注意文中要求细节，交代清楚事件发生的时间，地点，任务，事件，原因及其结果。同时还要注意5句成篇的文章的完整性，紧凑性。由于记叙文文体自由，不拘一格，所以它所涉及的内容极为广泛，考试的内容也会灵活多样，在这里笔者只就记叙文中的寓言，谚语，成语解释，故事类予以点拨。在前两年的广东高考中，曾经考过“守株待兔”的故事，是看图作文。寓言，谚语，成语解释，故事是将汉语中的一些故事梗概用英语解释出来。写作时要注意准确，句子要尽量流畅。在写作中应注意：

1）不要按照汉语的意思进行对号入座的直译。

2）正确运用时态，多为过去时。

3）对所给的提示语，信息点合并或拆分，要求意合，不要硬译。

4）严格控制句子数量，保证5句话。

5）应尽量用非谓语动词或复合句，巧用连接词。

记叙文所涉及的内容极为广泛，同学们发挥的空间比较大，同时对学生在词法与句法的灵活运用及正确运用上也是一个挑战，我们在此适当点拨并重新温习一下我们曾学习过的十个较好的常用的句型及句式；

1. no sooner…than…= hardly/scarcely…when… 一…就, 刚刚…就 (尽量把no sooner, hardly, scarcely 放句首, 句子倒装) 如：

Hardly had I gone to the bus stop when it began to rain.

No sooner had we arrived at the supermarket than our kid started to cry for home.

2. not ….until 的强调句型 如：

It wasn’t until all the fish died in the river that the villagers realized how serious the pollution was.

3. It was(not) / It will (not) be + 一段时间 + before… 过了多久才……(不久,就…) 如:

It wasn’t long before he realized his mistakes.

4. It is (has been ) +一段时间 + since + 过去时 自从… 到现在…如:

It is 8 years since I graduated from university. = I graduated from university 8 years ago.

5. used to do ...过去常常…; be used to doing习惯于… 如:

There used to be a small shop around the street corner.

I have been used to living on campus.

6. the more… the more… 越… 越… 如:

The higher up you go, the colder it will become.

7. as /so long as 只要…… 如:

As long as you stick to your plans, you will make great progress soon.

8. not only…, but also…/ so… that… /only+ 状语倒装句型 如:

Not only can he speak French, but also he has a good command of English.

Only when the mother came back, did she stop crying.

9. unless 除非, 如果不( = if … not) 如:

I won’t attend his party unless he comes to invite me in person.

10. with 独立主格结构; 作定语或状语,(注意此句型的灵活应用) 如:

China is a great country with a long history.

With the 2008 Olympic Games to be held, China is getting ready for them.

With his glasses broken, he couldn’t see the words on the blackboard clearly.

二，实战演练及解析

（1）[抛砖引玉]

请用英语解释一下“刻舟求剑”这个成语故事。故事大意为：楚国有个人坐船渡江时，他不小心把自己的一把宝剑掉落江中。他马上掏出一把小刀，在宝剑落水的船舷上刻上一个记号。船靠岸后，那楚人立即从船上刻记号的地方跳下水去捞取掉落的宝剑。他怎么找得到宝剑呢？船继续行驶，而宝剑却不会再移动。像他这样去找剑，真是太愚蠢可笑了。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写这个成语故事，要写标题。

2）这个成语故事必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

(2) [试题分析]

此题为一篇记叙文，是一则中国古代寓言故事：刻舟求剑。写这篇文章一定要把握好故事的完整性，用五个句子有头有尾描述整个故事，不要增多或随意删减故事情节。应用一些非谓语结构和复合句，注意掌握故事的以下要点，就可写好此篇文章。故事要点：1，掉剑2，刻记号 3，找剑 4，未寻

(3) [参考范文]

Making His Mark

A man from the state of Chu was taking a boat across a river when he dropped his sword into the water carelessly. Immediately he made a mark on the side of the boat where the sword dropped, hoping to find it later. When the boat stopped moving, he went into the water to search for his sword at the place where he had marked the boat. As we know, the boat had moved but the sword had not. Isn’t this a very foolish way to look for a sword?<

应用文-----通知，海报，便条，启事,守则，须知等

一、锦囊妙计

通知，海报，便条，启事等也是在日常生活中经常遇见的说明文的体裁，并为学生所熟悉，如同前面两期的写信和日记，这些都是同学们在日常生活中必不可少的活动，同时也是新课标的要求，因此，同学们在备考复习中应该掌握这些内容。下面我就通知，海报，便条和启事等在写作时所注意的事项给予分别点拨。

（一） 通知，海报

1．通知概述

由于海报与通知有着极大的相似性，因此笔者在此把它们合二为一，主讲通知这种常见题材。

通知的使用范围很广，凡需特定单位和人员知道、办理的事务均可使用通知。通知分为口头通知和书面通知两种，我们此处所谈的是书面通知。书面通知又分为书信通知和布告，书信通知沿用书信格式；寄出或发送，通知有关人员；另一种是布告式，张贴通知。究竟采用哪种形式，应视实际情况而定。一般说来，被通知对象为少量的分散人员，宜用书信的通知方式，其写法与普通书信的写法和要求相同；如被通知的对象为集中的较大范围内的人员，例如对象为学生、教师、工人、读者和观众等，则宜采用布告的通知方式。在本期中，我们重点讲述后一种。在新的高考作文题型中，由于5句话技术方面的要求，所以很难对通知的格式加以要求，而是更注重文章句子与句子之间的逻辑性与联系，同时要兼顾语言的准确性。 写作通知时应注意：

（1）人称。通知大多数为第三人称；但如果原文中已有称谓，则常常是第一人称。

（2）注意时态和语态。在通知中，被动语态和将来时态是最常见的，同时也是同学们薄弱的地方，所以一定在写作时加以重视，同时要认真审题。

（3）正确理解提示语，严格，准确按照题目要求去做。因为通知往往要涉及大量的时间与地点的细节问题，所以同学们一定要把握好信息点，不在马虎上失分。

（4）表达要准确，可以应用一些精练的词组，句型；但不要有太多的修饰语。

二，实战演练及解析

（1）[抛砖引玉]

中秋节即将来临，学生会将举办一场英语晚会，现请你以学生会的名义发一份英语书面通知，欢迎全校师生参加，通知包含以下要点：

晚会主题 中秋节英语晚会

时间 中秋节，8：00-10：00

地点 学校操场

节目内容 1． 学生表演的英语短剧，演唱英语歌曲，讲英语故事

2． 邀请外国学生为我们表演中国歌曲

其他 欢迎大家光临晚会，玩得开心

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份英语书面通知。

2）通知必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

(2) [试题分析]

此题为应用文---通知。文中没有对格式予以要求，所以我们可以不予以考虑。文中粗画，可以得知，它有6个信息点，我们加以合并，做好拟文的准备。①晚会主题为一句；②晚会时间，地点合为一句；③节目内容的第一句；④节目内容的第二句；⑤其他的内容为文章最后结尾。时态很明显应运用将来时态，同时应注意被动语态的正确应用。通知的内容很细致，明确，所以我们在写文章时，应注意语言的言简意赅。

(3) [参考范文]

In order to celebrate the coming mid-autumn festival, an English Evening party is going to be held by our Students’ Union. It will be held from 8 pm to 10 pm on the mid-autumn festival on our school playground. There will be many activities from the students, such as English short-play performances, English story telling and English songs. What’s more, some foreign students are to be invited to sing Chinese songs for us at the party. You are warmly welcomed to our English party and we are sure you will enjoy yourself.

(4) [范文点评]

1）内容完整，表达准确；

2）全文灵活正确的运用了大量的被动语态的句型；

3）在句子结构上使用了非谓语结构，副词连接上下文，突出了文章的连贯及逻辑性。

三，举一反三

[习作1]

假如你是学生会主席，根据下列内容和提示，写一篇通知稿，告之全校师生。通知包含以下要点：

1．事由：欢迎20名日本学生来校参观。

2．具体安排：

a.．9月15日上午8：45在校门口集合，欢迎来校参观的日本学生。

b．带客人到接待室(reception room)开联欢会(get-together)。

c．带客人参观图书馆、实验室和教学楼。

d．11：30和日本学生在食堂共进午餐，并互赠小礼物。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份英语书面通知，文中开头和结尾已经给出。

2）通知必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

Boys and girls,

Attention,please.___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________. The Japanese students will leave at about 12：00. That’s all. Thank you.

【试题答案1】

Boys and girls,

Attention, please. About twenty Japanese students will come to our school for a visit on September 15th. We’ll meet them at the school gate at 8：45 a.m., to give them a warm welcome. Then we’ll take them to the reception room, where we will hold a get-together. After that, we’ll show them around our library, the labs and the teaching building. At 11：30 we’ll have lunch with the Japanese students in the dining-hall, where we will exchange our presents with them. The Japanese students will leave at about 12：00. That’s all. Thank you.

[习作2]

假如你是广州市育才中学学生会主席，学生会要组织一场英语演讲比赛，请写一张有关举行英语演讲比赛的海报，海报内容如下：

举办单位： 学生会

比赛目的： 提高学生讲英语的能力

报名手续： 凡愿意参加者可到各班班长处报名

比赛时间： 5月6日下午2点

比赛地点： 第一会议室

评比办法： 有五位教师作评判员，前十名将获鼓励奖。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份英语海报，文中题目和结尾已经给出。

2）海报必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

A Poster for an English-Speaking Contest

.All are welcome to be present at the contest.

The Students’ Union

Yucai Senior Middle School

【试题答案2】

A Poster for an English-Speaking Contest

In order to improve the students’ ability to speak English, an English-speaking contest will be held by our Students’ Union. It will be held at 2 p.m. on May 6th. in No. 1 meeting room. Anyone who is willing to take part please go to your monitor and enter you name for it. Five teachers have been invited to work as judges. The first ten winners will be given awards as an encouragement. All are welcome to be present at the contest.

The Students’ Union,

Yucai Senior Middle School

[习作3]

假如你是学生会主席李明。学校将邀请王教授为同学们做一个报告，请根据以下内容拟一份通知。

主讲人：访美归国的王教授。

内容：美国中学教育。

时间：四月二十五日下午二点至四点半。

地点：校会议室

对象：全体高三学生，欢迎其它年级学生参加。

要求：不迟到，带钢笔和笔记本

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份通知，文中开头和结尾已经给出。

2）通知必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

Boys and girls,

Attention, please. This is Li Ming from Students’ Union._____________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.

Thank you very much.

【试题答案3】

Boys and girls,

Attention, please. This is Li Ming from Students’ Union. There will be a talk on the education of high school in America from 2：00 to 4：30 p.m. on April 25th in our meeting room. The talk will be given by Professor Wang, who has just been back from a visit to America. All students in Senior Three are to attend it. Please be punctual and bring your pens and notebooks with you. Students from other grades are welcome as well. Thank you.

[习作4]

学校学生会为了帮助大家学好电脑，特邀请广州大学计算机系的李教授在4月20日，下午2点来校讲座，请根据以下内容，写一份书面通知。

主讲人： 广州大学计算机系的李教授

主题： 关于计算机的用途以及如何利用Internet进行学习

地点： 校图书馆三楼

参加对象： 电脑爱好者

其他： 参加者准备一些在学习中遇到的问题

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份通知，文中开头和结尾已经给出。

2）通知必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯

Notice

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.You will benefit from the lecture and please be on time. That’s all. Thank you.

the Students’ Union

【试题答案4】

Notice

To help students learn more about the computer, our Students’ Union has invited Professor Li from the Computer Department of Guangzhou University to give us a lecture at 2 pm. on 20th April. Professor Li will give us a talk on the use of the computer and how to take advantage of the Internet. The lecture will be held on the third floor of the school library. Any computer-lover is welcome to attend the lecture. Please prepare some questions in computer learning, which will be answered by professor during the lecture. You will benefit from the lecture and please be on time. That’s all. Thank you.

the Students’ Union

[习作5]

假设由你接待一组加拿大中学生代表团，该团只能在北京逗留两天。请你按以下提示拟一个口头通知，内容要点如下：

1． 集合时间：周三早晨7点。

2． 集合地点：宾馆门口。

3． 活动安排：首先建议去长城。长城是是世界八大奇观之一，有20个世纪的悠久历史。第二天上午参观故宫，它建于14，曾有24位皇帝在那儿居住过。参观它，可以更多地了解中国历史。

[写作内容]

1）请按内容要求写一份口头通知，文中开头和结尾已经给出。

2）通知必须包括所有内容要点，但不要逐条译成英语。

[写作要求]

只能使用5个句子表达全部的内容。

[评分标准]

句子结构准确，信息内容完整和连贯。

Boys and girls,

May I have your attention, please? ________________________

篇6：高三英语写作教案(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Topic: write a concise passage

Time: 2:55 p.m. March 17,

Purpose: 1. explain why wordiness appears in writing usually.

2. Make a wordy phrase, sentence and passage concise.

3. Build up a concise passage.

Aids: CAI, computer and POH.

Procedures:

In general: 1. Pre-learning: give examples and ask students to discuss how wordiness happens.

2. Presentation: summary what students express and induce them to think how to correct wordy sentences.

3. Practice: direct students to correct wordy phrases, sentences, and passages and organize certain rules by themselves.

4. Consolidation: write a concise passage according to the given requirements (Picture story).

5. Homework: 1) Correct some other passages.

2) surf website about English Writing.

In detail:

Step I. Pre-learning.

Give two different versions of passages and ask students to compare:

The two passages:

Passage one: Tom is four years old and he is energetic. One day a bike was give to him. The bike is new and it is a light blue color. Tom received the bike for his birthday. He struggled to ride his bike. He struggled for two hours. However, he was unsuccessful in riding the bike.

Passage two: Four-year-old Tom is energetic. One day, he got a light blue bike for his birthday. He struggled for two hours to ride it, but he was unsuccessful.

The hint: passage one is too long with many redundant words, while the second is concise and clear. That is what should be achieved in writing.

Step II. Presentation.

Show wordy phrases and sentences. Ask students to discuss how wordiness appears and find out the way to correct them.

Sample one: The employee with anger quarreled with his boss. (angry)

A girl likes Chinese food better. (prefer)

There are many People hunting animals for living in the mountain. (hunters)

In the not too distant future, our dreams will come true. (near)

He gave up school on condition of the fact that it was necessary for him to support his family. (because)

Summary one: Change phrases into single words.

Sample two: The house, which was built newly is near the sea.

(The newly-built house )

People who are interested in the job must send your resume to our company before Friday.

(People interested in the job)

The way that is most efficient and convenient...

(the most efficient and convenient way)

While he is waiting for the bus, he always recites texts. (While waiting for the bus or Waiting for…)

Please put the money at a place where it is safe.

(please put the money at a safe place )

summary two: change clauses in phrases.

Sample three: A letter was sent by Mrs. Smith.

(Mrs. Smith sent a letter)

Your luggage will be checked by a custom official and then a pass card will be given to you.

(A custom official will check your luggage and give you a pass card)

The production of the factory was affected greatly by so many inexperienced workers.

(So many inexperienced workers affected the production of the factory greatly.)

Although Chinese is regularly used by students, a close and complete study of the subject is seldom taken by them.

(Although students regularly use Chinese, they seldom take a close and complete study of the subject.)

Summary three: change unnecessary passive into active voice.

Sample four: The skirt is blue in color. (the skirt is blue)

In the year of 1840 the war broke out.

(The war broke our in 1840)

We plan to meet before sunrise very early in the morning. (We plan to meet before sunrise)

I play basketball equally as well as my brother.

(I play basketball as well as my brother.)

summary four: avoid repetition.

Step III. Practice

Correct wordy sentences and passage.

1. There are many ways in which a student who is interested in meeting foreign students may come to know one.

(Students interested in meeting foreign students may come to know one in many ways.)

2. There are many farmers in the area who are planning to attend the meeting which is fixed for next Friday.

(Many farmers in the area plan to attend the meeting fixed for next Friday)

3. To work as a accountant, an education in money planning is required.

(To work as a accountant, one requires to study money planning.)

4. The subjects that are considered most important by students are those that have been shown to be useful to them after graduation.

(Students consider the subjects shown useful to them after graduation most important.)

5. The decision that was reached by the committee was to put off the vote.

(The committee reached the decision to put off the vote.)

(The committee decided to put off the vote)

6. The animal trainer dove into the pool. The trainer was skilled and athletic. She was excited when she dove into the pool. She swam with two dolphins. The dolphins were babies. The dolphins were playful. The trainer swam with the dolphins for over an hour. When the trainer swam with the dolphins, she was happy.

(The skilled, athletic animal trainer excitedly dove into the pool and happily swam for over an hour with two playful baby dolphins.)

Step IV. Consolidation.

Ask students to write a passage as concise as possible and evaluate some examples in class through POH. (Picture and story)

Step V. Homework

1. Give students more samples of wordiness to revise and improve.

1)Before the travel agent was completely able to finish explaining the various differences among all of the many very unique vacation packages his travel agency was offering, the customer changed her future plans.

2)During that time period, many car buyers preferred cars that were pink in color and shiny in appearance.

3) Our branch office currently employs five tellers. These tellers do an excellent job Monday through Thursday but cannot keep up with the rush on Friday and Saturday.

4) The blizzard contained strong winds and heavy snow. During the snowstorm, the roof of the town library collapsed. The roof of the post office did the same. The blowing snow covered the county roads. Schools cancelled classes due to the white-out conditions.

5) Locked away in the old chest, Richard was surprised by the antique hats.

2. Click website http：／／www.englishonline.nei or http：／／www.esldirect.com for more information about writing if it is possible.

篇7：高三第二轮复习----阅读理解(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

教学内容：阅读理解的解题指导及相关练习。

三维目标：、

（1） 知识目标：了解阅读理解的命题特点、解题方法及技巧。

（2） 能力目标：熟练掌握阅读理解的考核项目及解题思路、备考策略。

（3） 情感目标：揭开阅读理解的神秘面纱，使学生树立信心，从容应对。

教学重点：阅读理解的解题方法及技巧。

教学难点：如何从对整篇文章的把握，对特定细节以及复杂句子的理解方面提高学生的归纳、推理、判断能力，选出最佳选项。

教学方法：演绎归纳法。通过对此题型的讲解和归纳，使学生能够更容易从方法上去把握，从练习中去体会其解题的规律。

教学课时：3～4课时

教学用具：多媒体课件；黑板；

教学过程：

Step 1 Introduction

广东省高考英语阅读理解题的考查目的:

高考阅读理解要求考生在20分钟左右的时间内，完成对三篇不同题材、体裁文章的理解。另外，今年还增加了信息匹配题。要求考生在5分钟左右的时间内，完成对一篇文章有关信息的筛选和匹配。阅读理解考查的不仅是考生对整篇文章的把握能力，还考查了他们快速捕捉信息、准确理解特定细节以及复杂句子的能力；考生不仅要理解文章的表层意思，更重要的是要通过文章的表层去合理推断、挖掘文章的隐含意义、延伸意义。这是对考生能力、智力、心理的一个综合检验。阅读理解的好坏在很大程度上决定着英语考试成绩。

20广东省高考英语阅读理解题的命题形式

高考阅读理解试题的类型主要分为四种：细节理解题、推理判断题、猜测词义题和主旨大意题。它们常见的提问形式如下：

（1） 细节理解题常见的提问形式

Which of the following (statements) is TRUE/not TRUE?

According to the passage, who(what, where ,when, why, how, etc,)…?

The following are mentioned EXCEPT______?

Why does the author say…?

Where in the passage does the author describe…?

(2) 推理判断题常见的提问形式

The writer implies that______

It can be inferred from the passage that______

It suggests that_______

It can be included from the passage that_____

We can draw a conclusion that_____

We can learn from the passage that____

(3)猜测词义题常见的提问形式

The underlined word “hit”( in paragraph 1) probably means___

What does the underlined part“reimburse you” probably mean?

By saying “it is all worth it” in the last paragraph ,the author means that ______

(4)主旨大意题常见的提问形式

What is the main idea of the passage?

The best title for the passage might be____

The main purpose of the passage is to _____

The passage mainly tells us /is mainly about___

Step 2 Main content

**阅读理解解题技巧

我们结合《英语周报》高三广州专版第30,31期的专题复习内容研以及配套的例题分析(见《英语周报》),针对高考阅读理解的四种主要题型,给学生做解题策略指导和技巧总结.

1.如何快速、准确地捕捉信息词句，做好细节理解题

策略指导：先浏览一遍题目，把题目的要求储存在大脑中，带着疑问去快速阅读，然后找出与题目相关的信息词句加以理解分析，去伪存真。此种办法能有效地避免做细节理解题时的失误。

【技巧总结】准确捕捉信息，注意对信息进行综合分析，分清主次、真伪，避免受信息的干扰，陷入高考题所设下的“陷阱”，误选干扰项，因为某些干扰选项在文章中也能找到“依据”，具有很强的迷惑性。

2. 如何进行推理判断，做好推理判断题

策略指导：深层含义通常是隐藏在文字背后的延伸之意，弦外之音，如作者的意图、倾向、语气，人物的性格、心理、情感，故事的结局，事情的因果关系等。因此大家需调动自己的逻辑思维能力，透过字里行间，去严密推理，合理想象。

【技巧总结】隐含信息并非“空穴来风”， 而是“有源之水”，即隐含信息也是以文章的语言为载体。大家应准确捕捉信息，调动智力因素，严密推理，合理想象，忌“凭空想象 ”或“断章取义”。在阅读理解中结合自己的常识进行判断是必要的，但决不能以常识取代信息分析。推理判断既要严密，又要灵活。

3. 如何进行词义的判断，做好语意理解题

策略指导：首先从词汇所处的语境进行分析，注意上下文之间的关系，如：如果出现that is, that is to say或破折号等，我们可以断定，后面的内容是对前面内容的解释；如果出现转折词but, however, yet以及表示相反结果的on the contrary, on the other hand等，我们可以从所给内容相反的意义去考虑。

【技巧总结】高考语意判断题很多都是考查旧词新义的理解。因此大家需把词汇或短句的字面意义与语境和上下文结合起来，选择最切合文章内容，最符合上下文逻辑的意义，切忌望文生义。

4. 如何抓住文章的中心和主线，做好主旨大意题

策略指导： 读完一篇短文后应有意识地回味一下文章的大致内容，理一理文章的脉络，体会一下段与段之间的内在联系，这样做文章的中心一般都能概括出来, 涉及文章主旨大意方面的题目自然会在头脑中由模糊变清晰。

【技巧总结】我们在归纳文章主题时，一定要注意选项的内涵和外延必须能恰如其分地概括文章的主题，既不能范围过大，也不能把某一细节或侧面误当作主题。阅读时我们还应注意捕捉文章出现频率较高的中心词汇以及文章和段落的主题句。在选择文章题目时，还应注意语言方面的特点：文章题目往往具有凝练、醒目的特点。

5. 猜测词义题

猜测词义是从特定的角度考查考生的阅读理解能力和处理生词的能力。猜测词义包括对词、词组和句意的理解，是高考英语试题阅读理解中的一类必考题。猜测词义题常见的解题方法：

（一）上下文线索猜测词义

任何一篇文章中的句子在内容上都不是绝对孤立的，都跟句子所在的段落及整篇文章有关。利用上下文提供的情景和线索，进行合乎逻辑的综合分析而推测词义，是阅读过程中的一大关键，也是高考的热点。

如：If he thinks he can invite me out, he is all wet. I don’t like to be with him.

A. drunk B. sweating C. happy D. mistaken

分析：根据I don’t like to be with him我们感受到说话人的语气。我不愿意跟他在一起，那么，他要邀请我出去是不可能的 他就大错特错了。因此答案D。

（二）根据定义或解释猜测词义

阅读文章中的有些生词尤其是新闻报导及科普类文章中的生词，往往在其后有对该词进行解释说明性的短语或句子，如to be, that is , mean, stand for, namely, to refer to, to mean ,in other words等，有时也以同位语、定语从句的形式出现，或用破折号、括号来表示。

如：Some ships carried cargo such as coal, oil and military supplies(军用物资),while others carried only passengers.

分析：such as后所列举物品均为“货物”，由此推断cargo的意思相同，和后面的passengers形成对比。

（三）. 根据反义词或反义关系

有的文章作者为了增强表达效果，会用一对反义词揭示事物的不同点，形成鲜明的对比，这时只要把握其中的一词，就不难推出另一词的含义，这种句子多见unlike, although, but, yet, while, on the contrary, on the other hand, for one thing, for another, instead of, rather than等信息词。如：One idea about business is that it can be treated as a game of perfect information. Quite the reverse, business polite, life itself is games which we must normally play with very imperfect information.

A. Quite right. B. Time enough. C. Most unlike. D. Just the opposite.

分析：由前句中perfect information到后面imperfect information这一组对比关系的词，我们可以推断应为“对比、相反”的意思。

(四). 根据同义词或近义词关系

常见的引出同义词的标志性词语有or, like, similarly等。如：

Millions of animals die each year on Us roads, the Highway administration reports. In fact, only about 80 ocelots, an endangered wild cat exist in the US today. The main reason? Roadkill.

分析：从后面的同位语an endangered wild cat可知“ocelot”是一种野生猫

（五）利用例证性线索

某些冷僻的词汇后面会举一个例子，使词汇具体易懂。等连接性词语往往用来举例说明前面较难理解的名词。

如：You can take any of the periodicals: The World of English, Foreign Language Teaching in School, or English Learning.

分析：通过后面的例子：《英语世界》、《中小学外语教学》、《英语学习》，可知periodicals为“期刊杂志”

（六）根据构词法猜测词义

阅读中常会遇到一些由所熟悉的单词派生或合成的新词，可利用构词法知识来推测其意思。

如：Exhibition officials said that a person bitten by one of these snakes would need at least 80ml of an anti-poison medicine to be saved.

分析：anti-poison 是由poison加前缀anti-构成的，anti-意思是“反对、排斥、抵抗”，由此可猜出anti-poison是“解毒、抗毒”的意思。

5. 结构复杂的长句子出现在阅读理解中往往造成大家心理上的紧张，有时读了好几遍还不知道句子的意思，白白浪费了时间,如何对待阅读理解中的长句子?

策略指导：阅读理解中的结构复杂的句子一般分为两大类：第一类是由复合句或并列句构成的长复杂句子；第二类是省略句。对于第一类句子，大家应抓其主干成分，理解其主体意思，其他的成分都是对主体意思的修饰和补充。对于第二类句子，大家应通过上下文找出省略成分，把句子补充完整。

【技巧总结】结构复杂的句子往往出现在说明文或议论文中，这是造成考生心理紧张的主要原因。大家应冷静下来，结合文章所说明或议论的中心话题，抓住主干，层层理解。

6.信息匹配题

主要考察学生的速读能力，即在有限的时间内理解、总结信息并且能快速找到相关的信息的能力。学生要学会寻读（scan），抓关键信息，然后进行匹配。

Step 3 Homework and consolidation exercises

1. 《英语周报》高三广州专版第30,31期的专题复习内容。

2. 《英语周报》高三广州专版第33-34期的年高考英语模拟试题（一 ）--（十二）一共12套。

3. 和2007年全国各地的英语高考试题中的阅读理解。

补充材料：

阅读理解应测试的能力

阅读理解旨在考查考生理解总体和特定信息的能力。

1. 理解主旨要义的能力

任何一篇文章都有一个主旨要义。有时从文章的第一个段落甚至第一个句子即可以得出文章的主旨要义。从这个段落或句子，读者可以知道文章描述的是谁或什么即文章的主题，也会了解作者希望读者了解主题方面的哪些内容。有时，文章的主旨要义则需要从文章的字里行间进行推断。这类试题主要考查考生的略读文章、领会大意的能力，有时候它

对考生的归纳、概括能力有一定的要求。

2. 理解文中具体细节信息的能力

一篇文章的主题和中心确定之后，还需要有大量的细节信息支持。这些细节对于理解全文的内容至关重要，同时也是归纳和概括文章中心思想的基础，因而不容忽视。

3. 根据上下文猜测生词的词义的能力

正确理解文章中单词或短语的含义是理解文章的第一步，也是理解文章的基础。不懂得单词的含义根本就谈不上理解文章。但是，有时候英语单词的含义并非等同于词典上标注的汉语意思，其含义随不同的语境会有所不同。根据上下文正确理解灵活多变的词义，

才算是真正初步具备了一定的阅读理解能力。

4. 做出简单判断和推理的能力

在实际阅读活动中，有时候需要根据文章提供的线索和事实，进行逻辑推理，推测作

者未提到的事实或某事情发生的可能性。

5. 理解文章的基本结构的能力

英语文章讲究主题段和主题句。主题段通常在文章的开头，主题句可能在某一段的开头、中间或结尾，作用是交代该段的中心思想，再由全段展开或讨论这个意思。段与段之间通常有词语连接，承上启下，使文章行文连贯。如果希望准确、深刻地理解一篇文章，必须对文章的结构有所了解，把握住全文的文脉，即句与句、段与段之间的逻辑关系。对

这种能力的考查一般反映在文章的中心思想、文中某段的大意或指代关系的题目中。

6. 理解作者的意图和态度的能力

每篇文章都有一个特定的写作目的，或是向读者传递某个信息，或是愉悦读者，或是讲授某个道理。而这些信息通常不是明确表达出来，而是隐含在文章之中。因此，这类问

题要求考生在理解文章总体的基础之上，去领会作者的眼外之意。

下面结合2007年广东高考阅读理解试题，具体分析对这些能力的考查：

A

How should one invest a sum of money in these days of inflation (通货膨胀)? Left in a bank it will hardly keep its value, however high the interest rate. Only a brave man, or a very rich one, dares to buy and sell on the Stock Market. Today it seems that one of the best ways to protect your saving and even increase your wealth is to buy beautiful objects from the past. Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques.

I sometimes wonder what a being from another planet might report back about our way of life. “The planet Earth is ruled by a mysterious creature that sits or stands in a room and makes a strange ticking sound, it has a face with twelve black marks and two hands. Men can do nothing without it's permission, and it fastens its young round people's wrists so that everywhere men go they are still under its control. This creature is the real master of Earth and men are its slaves. ” Whether or not we are slaves of time today depends on our culture and personality, but it is believed that many years ago kings kept special slaves to tell the time. Certain men were very clever at measuring the time of day according to the beating of their own hearts. They were made to stand in a fixed place and every hour or so would shout the time. So it seems that the first clocks were human beings.

However, men quickly found more convenient and reliable ways of telling the time. They learned to use the shadows cast by the sun. They marked the hours on candles, used sand in hourglasses, and invented water-clocks. Indeed, any serious student of antique should spend as much time as possible visiting palaces, stately homes and museums to see some of the finest examples of clocks from the past.

Antique clocks could be very expensive, but one of the joys of collecting clocks is that it is still possible to find quite cheap ones for your own home. After all, if you are going to be ruled by time, why not invest in an antique clock and perhaps make a future profit?

41. According to the passage, collecting antique clocks______.

A. can hardly keep the value of your savings

B. will cost much of your savings

C. may increase your wealth

D. needs your bravery

42. By quoting (引用) the remark of a being from another planet, the author intends to________.

A. suggest human beings are controlled by a clock

B. describe why clocks can rule the planet Earth

C. tell readers what clocks look like

D. compare clocks to human beings

43. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a way to measure the time?

A. Counting the beating of one's own heart.

B. Making use of candles, sand and water.

C. Observing shadows cast by the sun.

D. Keeping slaves busy day and night.

44. The underlined phrase “stately homes”in paragraph 4 means________.

A. state-owned houses

B. houses in very good condition

C. grand houses open to the public

D. houses where statesmen meet regularly

45. The purpose of the passage is_______.

A. to introduce the culture of antique clocks

B. to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks

C. to compare different ways to make a future profit

D. to explain convenient and reliable ways of telling time

[导读] 这是一篇叙议结合的散文。人们在通货膨胀的今天应该怎样投资一笔钱呢？存在银行里，这笔钱几乎不能够保值，无论存款利息多么高。只有勇敢的人或是富有者才敢于在股票市场买卖。今天保护你的储蓄甚至增加你的财富最好方法之一似乎是购买过去遗传下来的漂亮的物品。因此，作者顺理成章地提出一些关于收藏古董闹钟的忠告，奉劝人

们投资收藏古董闹钟以便将来盈利。

Key: 41. C 42. A 43. D 44. C 45. B

41. C。细节事实理解题。收集闹钟可以增加你的财富。根据第1段的句子：Today it seems that one of the best ways to protect your saving and even increase your wealth is to buy beautiful objects from the past. Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques. 今天保护你的储蓄甚至增加你的财富最好方法之一似乎是购买过去的漂亮的物品。这里我打算提供一些关于收集古董闹钟的忠告，我个人认为它们是最令人感兴趣的古董之一。再看最后一段最后一句：After all, if you are going to be ruled by time, why not invest in an antique clock and perhaps make a future profit?别忘了，如果你打算受时间制约，请投资收藏古董闹钟以便将

来盈利吧？

42. A。深层含义理解题。作者引用外星人的话，目的是为了说明人类被闹钟所控制。根据第2段的引文意思：有时候我想知道一个外星人关于我们的生活方式可能会反馈回去的报告内容是什么。“地球这个行星被神秘的动物控制，这种动物坐在或站在一个房间里并发出一种奇怪的滴答声，它有一张脸，脸上有12个黑色的标记，还有两只手。如果没有它的命令人们什么事情也不做，并且它把它那年轻的圆圆的人们的手腕系得紧紧地，这样，无论人们走到那里，都处于它的控制之下。这个动物是地球的真正的主人，人是它的

” 奴隶。

43. D。细节判断题。A项与第2段的下列句子吻合：Certain men were very clever at measuring the time of day according to the beating of their own hearts.; B项与第3段的下列句

子吻合：They marked the hours on candles, used sand in hourglasses, and invented water-clocks；C项与第3段的下列句子吻合：They learned to use the shadows cast by the sun.；D项的含义是：“让奴隶日夜忙碌”，这与第2段的下列句子不一致：... but it is believed that many years ago kings kept special slaves to tell the time.但是人们相信许多年之前国王们畜养了专用的奴隶来辨别时间。

44. C。词义猜测题。state-owned houses国有的房子；houses in very good condition状况良好的房子；grand houses open to the public对公众开放的宏伟的房子；houses where statesmen meet regularly政治家们经常集会的房子。根据第4段的信息词student, visiting palaces和museums判断，认真研究古董的学生应该尽可能多花时间参观宫殿、宏伟的房

子和博物馆，可以看见一些过去遗传下来的最精致的闹钟的珍品。

45. B。写作意图题。作者的写作目的是为了提出一些关于收藏古董闹钟的忠告。见第1段句子：Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques. 这里我打算提供一些关于收藏古董闹钟

的忠告，我个人认为它们是最令人感兴趣的古董之一。

B

Do you want to live with a strong sense of peacefulness, happiness, goodness, and self-respect? The collection of happiness actions broadly categorized as “honor” help you create this life of good feelings.

Here's an example to show how honorable actions create happiness.

Say a store clerk fails to charge us for an item. If we keep silent, and profit from the clerk's mistake, we would drive home with a sense of sneaky excitement. Later we might tell our family or friends about our good fortune. On the other hand, if we tell the clerk about the uncharged item, the clerk would be grateful and thank us for our honesty. We would leave the store with a quiet sense of honor that we might never share with another soul.

Then, what is it to do with our sense of happiness?

In the first case, where we don't tell the clerk, a couple of things would happen. Deep down inside we would know ourselves as a type of thief. In the process, we would lose some peace of mind and self-respect. We would also demonstrate that we cannot be trusted, since we advertise our dishonor by telling our family and friends. We damage our own reputations by telling others. In contrast, bringing the error to the clerk's attention causes different things to happen. Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased. Whenever we take honorable action we gain the deep internal rewards of goodness and a sense of nobility.

There is a beautiful positive cycle that is created by living a life of honorable actions.

Honorable thoughts lead to honorable actions. Honorable actions lead us to a happier existence. And it's easy to think and act honorably again when we're happy. While the positive cycle can be difficult to start, once it's started, it's easy to continue. Keeping on doing good deeds brings us peace of mind, which is important for our happiness.

46. According to the passage, the positive action in the example contributes to our .

A. self-respect

B. financial rewards

C. advertising ability

D. friendly relationship

47. The author thinks that keeping silent about the uncharged item is equal to .

A. lying

B. stealing

C. cheating

D. advertising

48. The phrase “bringing the error to the clerk's attention” (in para. 5) means .

A. telling the truth to the clerk

B. offering advice to the clerk

C. asking the clerk to be more attentive

D. reminding the clerk of the charged item

49. How will we feel if we let the clerk know her mistake?

A. We'll be very excited.

B. We'll feel unfortunate.

C. We'll have a sense of honor.

D. We'll feel sorry for the clerk.

50. Which of the following can be the best title of this passage?

A. How to Live Truthfully

B. Importance of Peacefulness

C. Ways of Gaining Self-respect

D. Happiness through Honorable Actions

[导读] 这是一篇说理、规劝性的议论文。本文的中心是：作者提倡通过高尚的行为获得幸福，规劝人们多行善事获得幸福，以形成一种美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想行为可以使你的生活具有一种和平感、幸福感、善良感和自尊感。过高尚行为的生活可以创造美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想导致高尚的行为。高尚的行为致使我们幸福的生存。当我们幸福的时候，我们容易产生高尚的思想和行为。虽然积极的循环难以开启，但是，一旦开启，就容易继续下去。坚持不断地做善事会给我们到来平静的心理，这样做对我们的幸福

很重要。

Key: 46-50 ABACD

46. A。细节事实理解题。第5段第6-8句：In contrast, bringing the error to the clerk's attention causes different things to happen. Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased.比较而言，把这个错误引起这个职员的注意导致几件事情发生。职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我

们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自尊在增加。

47. B。细节事实理解题。第5段第1-2句：In the first case, where we don't tell the clerk, a couple of things would happen. Deep down inside we would know ourselves as a type of thief. 在第一个案例中，我们不告诉那个职员，有几件事情会发生。在内心深处我们会知道我们

自己就是小偷。

48. A。句子意思猜测题。第5段分两层意思。第1-5句是第一层意思：在第一个案例中，我们不告诉那个职员，有几件事情会发生。在内心深处我们会知道我们自己就是小偷。在这个过程中，我们的心理会失去平静，也失去自尊。我们也会证明我们不可以信赖，因为我们通过告诉家里的人和朋友的方式来忠告我们的耻辱。第5段第6-8句是第二层意思：比较而言，把这个错误引起这个职员的注意导致几件事情发生。职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自尊在增加。通过对比这两层意思，可以判断bringing the error to the clerk's attention意思是“实话告诉这个职

员”。

49. C。细节事实理解题。第5段第7-8句：Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased. 职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自

员”。

50. D。归纳标题。结合第1段和最后一段，并综合全文，我们可以得知：通过高尚的行为获得幸福。过高尚行为的生活可以创造美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想导致高尚的行为。高尚的行为致使我们幸福的生存。当我们幸福的时候，我们容易产生高尚的思想和行为。虽然积极的循环难以开启，但是，一旦开启，就容易继续下去。坚持不断地做善事会

给我们到来平静的心理，这样做对我们的幸福很重要。

C

Malaria, the world's most widespread parasitic (寄生虫引起的)disease, kills as many as three million people every year ---- almost all of whom are under five, very poor, and African. In most years, more than five hundred million cases of illness result from the disease, although exact numbers are difficult to assess because many people don't (or can't) seek care. It is not unusual for a family earning less than two hundred dollars a year to spend a quarter of its income on malaria treatment, and what they often get no longer works. In countries like Tanzania, Mozambique, and the Gambia, no family, village, hospital, or workplace can remain unaffected for long.

Malaria starts suddenly, with violent chills, which are soon followed by an intense fever and, often, headaches. As the parasites multiply, they take over the entire body. Malaria parasites live by eating the red blood cells they infect (感染) .They can also attach themselves to blood vessels in the brain. If it doesn't kill you, malaria can happen again and again for years. The disease is passed on to humans by female mosquitoes infected with one of four species of a parasite. Together, the mosquito and the parasite are the most deadly couple in the history of the earth and one of the most successful. Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control. Studies show that mosquitoes are passing on the virus more frequently, and there are more outbreaks in cities with large populations. Some of the disease's spread is due to global warming.

For decades, the first-choice treatment for malaria parasites in Africa has been chloroquine, a chemical which is very cheap and easy to make. Unfortunately, in most parts of the world, malaria parasites have become resistant to it. Successful alternatives that help prevent resistance are already available, but they have been in short supply and are very expensive. If these drugs should fail, nobody knows what would come next.

51. According to paragraph I, many people don't seek care because .

A. they are too poor

B. it is unusual to seek care

C. they can remain unaffected for long

D. there are too many people suffering from the disease

52. People suffering from malaria .

A. have to kill female mosquitoes

B. have ability to defend parasites

C. have their red blood cells infected

D. have sudden fever, followed by chills

53. Which of the following may be the reason for the wide spread of the disease?

A. Its resistance to global warming.

B. Its ability to pass on the virus frequently.

C. Its outbreaks in cities with large populations.

D. Its ability to defend itself and resist new drugs.

54. It can be inferred from the passage that .

A. no drugs have been found to treat the disease

B. the alternative treatment is not easily available to most people

C. malaria has developed its ability to resist parasites

D. nobody knows what will be the drug to treat the disease

55. Which of the following questions has NOT been discussed in the passage?

A. How can we know one is suffering from malaria?

B. How many people are killed by malaria each year?

C. Why are there so many people suffering from malaria?

D. What has been done to keep people unaffected for long?

[导读] 这是一篇介绍医学科普常识的说明文。本文主要介绍疟疾病的起因、传播、危害与治疗。疟疾（Malaria）是世界上传播最广泛的寄生虫引起的病，每年都要使三百万人致命--几乎全是5岁以下的孩子，并且是贫穷的非洲人。疟疾病本身有很多基因，对于各种新药物具有抵抗性，所以目前还没有找到根治疟疾病的最佳治疗方法和药物。

Keys: 51-55 ACDBD

51. A。细节事实理解题。见第1段第2-3句：... because many people don't (or can't) seek care. It is not unusual for a family earning less than two hundred dollars a year to spend a quarter of its income on malaria treatment, and what they often get no longer works. (多年来，有5亿多病例由这种病引起的，虽然确切的数字难以估计，) 因为许多人不去寻求（或不可能）医疗护理。这种情况对于一个年收入不到200美元的家庭并非不同寻常，因为要治疗疟疾病，

就花去年收入的四分之一，并且他们时常所得到的不再有效。

52. C。细节事实理解题。见第2段第3句：Malaria parasites live by eating the red blood cells they infect (感染) .疟疾寄生虫依靠吃他们感染的红血球生存。这说明疟疾病患者的红

血球受到感染。

53. D。细节事实理解题。这种疾病之所以广泛传播是因为它有一种自我防御和抵抗新药物的能力。见第2段倒数第3句：Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change

rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control.。

54. B。推理判断题。根据第3段倒数第2句：Successful alternatives that help prevent resistance are already available, but they have been in short supply and are very expensive. 一些成功的可供选择的化学药品在阻止疟疾的这种抵抗力方面已经出现效用，但是这些可供选

择的化学药品非常短缺，并且昂贵，因此大多数人不容易得到可供选择的治疗。

55. D。细节事实理解题。A项见第2段第1句：Malaria starts suddenly, with violent chills, which are soon followed by an intense fever and, often, headaches；B项见第1段第1句：... kills as many as three million people every year almost all of whom are under five, very poor, and African.；C项见第2段第3句：Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control.；又见第1段第2

句：... because many people don't (or can't) seek care.；D项没有提到。

篇8：高三第二轮复习-----语法填空（广东）(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

教学内容：语法填空的解题指导及相关练习。

三维目标：、

（1） 知识目标：了解新题型语法填空的命题特点、解题方法及技巧。

（2） 能力目标：熟练掌握常考的语法点，正确运用八条解题思路及备考策略。

（3） 情感目标：揭开语法填空的神秘面纱，使学生树立信心，从容应对。

教学方法：演绎归纳法，通过对此新题型的讲解和归纳，使学生能够更容易从方法上去把握，从练习中去体会其解题的规律。

教学重点：语法填空的解题方法及技巧。

教学难点：动词（时态、语态、非谓语动词）的把握，各种从句连词的选择。

教学课时：3~4课时

教学用具：多媒体课件；黑板；

教学过程：

Step 1 Introduction

语法填空题是广东省2007高考的一种新题型。在一篇大约180多词的、难度适中的短文中，挖出10个空格，每空1.5分，满分15分。有的空格后有提示，有的没有提示，要求完成固定短语搭配、语法填空、词形变化等。因为不给出任何选项，这就加大了学生做题的难度，对学生提出了更高的要求。因此，我们平时必须不断的加强这一方面的训练，到高考时才能从容镇定，应对自如。

Step 2 Main content

一、命题特点

1．所选短文大约180多词，难度适中，基本符合高中生阅读。

2．挖空一般较均匀，不过密也不过疏。所缺的地方一般不会影响学生对文章的理解。

3．出题更多的是从词汇搭配和语言知识的运用上着手，上下文的理解放在相对次要的位置。

4．出题一般涉及到以下几个方面：1）动词与介词或副词搭配构成的固定动词短语；2）冠词的用法；3）连词的用法，包括从属连词和并列连词；4）派生词的用法；5）动词的适当形式；6）情态动词的用法；7）定语从句、名词性从句的引导词等。

二、解题方法及技巧

1．通读全文，把握大意。

通读全文的目的是为了把握全文的大意，为下一步填空做好语义上的准备。因为语义决定着空白处应填一个什么样的词语并采用什么样的语法形式。在通读全文的过程中，为了准确地把握其大意，很有必要弄清文章的题材，体裁，中心思想，写作线索，篇章结构，段落层次，逻辑关系，词句理解等。这样有助于考生真正读懂文章大意，也有利于填空时进行必要的逻辑推理。

2．仔细阅读，尝试填空。

在通读全文，基本把握文章大意之后，就可以着手尝试填空了。这一步是解题的关键，是一个对每个段落层次以及整个语篇中的词汇、句子、语义、语言结构和上下文语境进行综合分析并做出判断的复杂的思维过程，也是对每个考生的英语语法基本功，英语语篇的感觉能力，和运用英语思维的检验过程。

做题时，要求考生对空白处的词性能作出迅速的判断，对文章句子的结构能作出准确的分析。然后才能准确无误地填出答案。

3．复读全文，检查答案。

所有的空白处都填好了。这时，我们有必要把整篇文章从头至尾复读一遍。从语义和逻辑的角度审视全文，从词义辨析，词语搭配，和习惯用语等方方面面仔细推敲，看其语法是否正确，行文是否通顺流畅，条理是否清晰，逻辑是否合理，是否符合语感。要仔细揣摩，准确定夺。

另外，还要特别注意单词的拼写，千万不能犯由于单词写错而导致失分的低级错误。

三、备考策略

1．不断记忆，积累词汇。

2．夯实基础，学好语法。

3．大声朗读，培养语感。

语感是一种对语言、语段或词句的感受能力，是一种看不见摸不着的东西，但在做填空题时又是必不可少的东西。娴熟的语感的形成不是一蹴而就的，要在平时的学习过程中多听，多读，尤其是大声朗读犹为重要。在早读或晚读时间，抛开顾忌，放开喉咙，大声朗读，对培养语感是非常重要的。如果通过朗读能够多背诵一些课文是再好不过的了。语感在你的朗读和背诵课文的过程中，不知不觉地逐步形成了。

4．坚持不懈，多做练习。

总之，“冰冻三尺，非一日之寒。”备考语法填空题，平时既要积累扎实的基本功，又要掌握一定的解题技巧。只有这样，在高考中我们才能旗开得胜。

四．语法填空题的四大命题特点

1. 考查语法。每一个空格的设置都必定涉及到某一条或某几条语法规则，不会单纯考查单词的拼写和词组的用法。

例 1 In Greece, women had little freedom. Wealthy women hardly left their houses, but they____ (allow) to attend weddings and some festivals.

解析：因allow与they在逻辑上是动宾关系，要用被动语态，用be

allowed；由had, left可知be是一般过去式；主语是复数they，be的过去式是were，答案是were allowed。

点评：此题就涉及到动词的时态、语态和主谓一致三条语法规则。

例 2 The ____ why I was sad was that he didn't understand me.

解析：因为why 引导的定语从句，前面的先行词一定是reason。

点评：此题看起来好像是考查填入恰当的名词，但实际上是考查定语从句。

像下题这样重点考查单词拼写的试题，在高考语法填空题中出现的机会是不大的。

例3 It was ___(笨拙的) to use as one of the points of reference was the moving ship itself.

解析：此题答案为awkward。

点评：解答此题与句子意思理解无关，与语境更无关系，也与语法规则无多大关系，只考查单词的识记。

2. 考虑语境。既然采用短文的形式来考查语法，其目的就是要利用短文有较强语境的特点来命题，否则，就不如用单句来考查语法了。也就是说，考生要填出正确答案，至少需理解整个句子的意思或各分句之间的逻辑关系，或者需要理解前后几个句子，甚至整个段落或篇章。

例4 Several changes have brought wild animals to the . Foremost, air and water quality in many cities have improved as a result of the 1970's pollution control efforts…

解析：在冠词the后必定是名词，再根据下句可确定要填cities。

点评：本题若只根据设空句本身，而不阅读并理解下文，是不可能填出正确答案的。

诚然，像下列之类无需考虑语境的试题也有可能出现，但笔者认为，即使有，也不会多。

例5 I should have known when to hold fast and when to let go, which can help me avoid __ (feel) great pressure and upset.

解析：因为在avoid后作宾语的动词只能用-ing形式，所以答案为feeling。

点评：只要知道avoid 后接动词的-ing形式，就可填出答案，考生无需理解上下文，也无需理解本句句意即可填出答案，即解答此题无需考虑语境。

3. 考点分散。基本上一个空格代表一个语法点，10个空有可能涉及到10个语法点，至少也得有7个语法点。笔者认为，即使对一些非常重要的语法项目，如动词时态、非谓语动词、不定代词等，单独一项也可能是一空，至多两空，设三空的可能性是极小的。

4. 适当提示。

例6 Oil prices have risen by 32 percent since the start of the year, (reach) a record US$ 57.65 a barrel on April 4.

解析：reach及后面的内容是伴随着谓语动词的发生而产生的自然结果，用现在分词作状语，故填reaching。

例7 It would be _____ (believe) that such an honest fellow

should have betrayed his friends!

解析：因为在系动词be后作表语，要用believe的形容词形式believable；由句意“这样一个老实人竟会出卖朋友，真难以置信!”可知，还要在前面加上表示相反意义的前缀un，答案为 unbelievable。

Step 3 Explanation and deduction

五、典型例题示范

阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为36-45的相应位置。

Eric Clapton is one of the most __36_(success) rock stars of alltime. He has sold millions of copies of his records_37______ has

appeared in concerts all over the world.

Clapton was born in 1945 in a small town, __38__ is near London. When he was only two years old, his mother left him. Eric was brought __39__ by his grandparents. Until he was nine he believed that they were his parents and it was __40__ terrible shock when he found out that they weren't. But his grandparents treated him well. They paid for him _41_(go) to art college. __42___ Eric had already become interested in music and he started

playing the guitar in bars and clubs.

Clapton first became famous when he started a group __43__ (call) Cream. Not only __44 he play the guitar and sing but also he could write excellent songs. But while on stage he was the brilliant guitar-playing superstar, his private life was falling apart. __45_ his marriage broke off, he started taking drugs.

答案：

36. successful 37. and 38. which 39. up 40. a

41. to go 42. but 43. called 44. could45. After

本篇文章粗略地介绍了超级摇滚巨星Eric Clapton的生活。

36. 此处应该填形容词successful.

37. 他已经出售了成百万张唱片，而且也出现在全世界的音乐会上。前后两部分在语义上是并列关系。因此填and.

38. 此处是非限制性定语从句，先行词是地点在从句中缺少主语，故用which.

39. 当他两岁的时候，他妈妈就离开了他。Eric当然是由爷爷奶奶抚养长大。因此我们填brought up. 此处是被动语态。

40. 当他了解到他们不是（他的父母亲时），那是一个非常糟糕的打击。shock 在这里是抽象名词具体化，因此用不定冠词a.

41. 但是爷爷奶奶对他很好，他们出钱让他去美术学院。Pay for sb. to do sth.

42. 但是Eric已经对音乐产生了兴趣，他开始在酒吧和夜总会弹吉他。此处表示转折关系，用But.

43. 他创办了一个名叫Cream 的乐队，由此就成名了。a group 和call 之间是动宾关系，因此我们填called，过去分词短语做后置定语。.

44. 根据后半句也可知。他不仅能边弹吉他边唱歌，而且还能写优秀的歌曲。

45. 在舞台上，他是一个才华横溢的超级巨星。（但是）他的私生活却在逐步的土崩瓦解。在他的婚姻生活结束之后，他开始了吸毒。根据文章的意思，此处应该用介词after.

六．解答语法填空题的八条思路

要做好语法填空题，理解短文是解题的前提，扎实的词汇、句型和语法知识是基础，英语国家背景知识是必要的补充。现以下题为例，谈谈语法填空题的解题思路。

阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空：

A proverb says, “Time is money”. But in my opinion, time is even 1 precious than money. Why? 2 when money is spent, we can earn it back. However, when time is 3 , it will never return.

4 is known to all that the time we can use is limited.

Therefore we should make 5 use of our time to study hard so as to serve our country in 6 future.

But it is a pity that there are a lot of people 7 do not realize the value of time. They 8 ___ their precious time smoking, drinking and playing.

In a word, we should form the good habit of 9 (save) time. Do not put off what can be done today 10 tomorrow.

1. 根据语法知识进行填充

第1题，由than可知，precious要用比较级，多音节形容词的比较级在前面加more，故此题答案为more。

第7题，因there are…是个句子，do not…应是一个定语从句，缺主语，先行词是人，应填who。

2. 根据逻辑关系进行填充

就是根据上下文的逻辑关系来解题。

第2题，因前句用Why提问，应当用Because来回答，故此题答案是Because。

3. 根据语篇标志进行填充

语篇是指比单个句子长的语言单位（句群、段落、篇章等）。语篇间往往有标明内在联系的词，我们称这些词为“语篇标志词”。如表示结构层次的有first, second, third, finally等；表示逻辑关系的有thus，therefore，so等；表示转折关系或变换话题的有however, but, by the way等。“语篇标志词”对迅速理清文章的脉络，弄清上下文关系很有帮助。

第3题，由However可知，是指当时间失去的时候，表示“失去”是gone。

第5题，由Therefore可知，应充分利用时间，故用形容词full来修饰名词use。

4. 根据固定词组进行填充

熟练掌握一些常见的词组，如as a matter of, be proud of, by the way, come from, congratulate…on…, devote…to…, earn one’s living, keep one’s word, make up one’s mind等，对解题很有帮助。

第6题，表示“在将来”是固定词组in the future。

5. 根据句型搭配进行填充

就是根据一些常用的句型搭配，如so/such…that…, it is…(for sb.) to do sth., There is no doubt that…, there is no sense in doing sth.等来解题。

第4题，作形式主语，用It，真正的主语是后面的that从句。

6. 根据词汇知识进行填充

指根据某些词语在用法上的特殊搭配来解题。如下列各类动词必须牢记：只能接动词的-ing形式作宾语的动词，只能接to do作宾语的动词，接to do作补语的动词，接do作补语的动词，接doing或done作补语的动词，对句式搭配要求较为特别的词语，等等。

第8题，由time smoking可想到是spend time (in) doing句型，这是由spend的用法特别所决定的；这里是一般现在时，主语是复数，填spend。

第9题，因of是介词，介词后的动词通常要用-ing形式，故填saving。

7. 根据生活常识进行填充

第10题，结合生活常识，不难理解句意为“不要把今天能做的事推迟到明天去做”，答案自然是表示“直到”的until/till。

8. 根据文化背景进行填充

就是根据英语国家的文化背景知识来解题。

如After the flood Mr. Deng was as poor as a church_______.

这句话的意思是“水灾后邓先生一贫如洗了”。as poor as a church mouse（一贫如洗），所以此处填mouse。

又如Nobody wants to go out, for it is raining cats and ______ now.

这句话的意思是“因为外面大雨滂沱，没有人想出去”。It rains cats and dogs.是“大雨滂沱”之意，故此处填dogs。

当然，上述的解题思路不可能万试万灵。扎实的语言知识和综合语言运用能力才是解题根本。除掌握解题技巧外，建议同学们做到以下几点：(1)系统复习语法知识。(2)熟练掌握课标词汇。(3)坚持每天练习一篇。

语法填空 仔细阅读下面短文，短文中有10个空格。请按照每小题的语法要求，完成语法填空或词形变换。

Experiments have proved that children can [1] (instruct)in swimming at a very early age. At a special swimming pool in Los Angeles, children become expert at [2] their breath under water even before they can walk. [3] of two months old do not appear to be reluctant to enter the water. It is not long [4] they are so accustomed to swimming [5] they can pick up weights from the floor of the pool. A game that is very popular with these young [6] (swim) is the underwater tricycle race. Tricycles are lined up on the floor of the pool seven feet under water. The children compete against each other to reach the other end of the pool.

Many pedal their tricycles, [7] most of them prefer to push or drag them. Some children [8] (情态动词)cover the whole length of the pool [9] (介词)coming up for breath even once. Whether they will ever become future Olympic champions, only time will

tell. Meanwhile, they should encourage [10] (代词) among us who cannot swim five yards before they are gasping for air.

答案与解析：

1. be instructed 因instructed与children是动宾关系，要用被动语态，即“be+动词的过去分词”，情态动词后用动词原形。

2. holding 由under water可知是“屏住气”，固定搭配hold one’s breath；又因在介词(at)后要用动词的-ing形式。

3. Babies 由上下文可知是指“二个月大的婴儿”，baby的复数是变y为i再加es。

4. before 因it is not long before…(不久以后就)是固定句型。

5. that 因为so…that…(如此……以致……)是固定句型。

6. swimmers 由with可知，后接的是名词，又由young和句意可知是指人，即“游泳者”，且为复数。

7. but 前后是转折关系。

8. can 由语境可知空格单词意思为“能够”。

9. without由语境可知是“不用冒出水面呼吸”。

10. those 由语境，特别是among us和后面的who引导的定语从句可知，指“那些人”。

Step 4 Homework and consolidation exercises

补充： 语法填空应测试的能力

2007广东高考英语语法填空：

[主旨]这是一篇故事。作者讲述自己驱车在赶往the Taiyetos Mountains的半路上，在一个穷乡僻壤的山村附近，汽车却意外得出了毛病，适值太阳正要落山，正在进退两难之际，作者被一群乐于助人而又好客的村民相救的难忘经历。

[考查内容]动词2个（一个是谓语动词的一般过去式，一个是过去分词）；引导词2个（who引导宾语从句，where引导定语从句）；介词2个（都是与动词构成的固定搭配）；不定冠词1个（表示泛指）；代词2个（一个是不定代词作定语，一个是人称代词作宾语）；副词1个（形容词派生出副词）。

2007广东高考英语语法填空考查内容明细表

题号 赋分 答案 注解（此栏为本文作者添加）

31 1.5分 broke 原文提供原形动词break

32 1.5分 who 宾语从句引导词

33 1.5分 as 介词

34 1.5分 settled 原文提供原形动词settle

35 1.5分 a

36 1.5分 where 状语从句引导词

37 1.5分 Other

1.0分 Some

38 1.5分 merrily 原文提供形容词原级merry

39 1.5分 for 介词

40 1.5分 her 定语从句的宾语

[2007广东语法填空试题]

I was on my way to the Taiyetos Mountains. The sun was setting when my car 31(break) down near a remote and poor village. Cursing my misfortune, I was wondering where I was going to spend the night when I realized that the villagers who had gathered around me were arguing as to 32 should have the honor of receiving me 33 a guest in their house. Finally, I accepted the offer of an old woman who lived alone in a little house. While she was getting me 34 (settle) into a tiny but clean room, the head of the village was tying up his horse to my car to pull it to 35 small town some 20 kilometres away 36 there was a garage.

I had noticed three hens running free in my hostess's courtyard and that night one of them ended up in a dish on my table. 37 villagers brought me goat's cheese and honey. We drank together and talked 38 (merry) till far into the night. When the time came for me to say goodbye to my friends in the village, I wanted to reward the old woman 39 the trouble I had caused 40 .

下面是来自阅卷人的信息：

分析一：

从以上评分标准中可以看出，语法填空每空只填一个单词，

分析二：

从答案形式来分析，原文提供三个词供考生变化（31题的break, 34题的settle, 38题的merry），两个须填理解句子成分的从句引导词（32题的who, 36题的where），两个需要理解上下文才能填的代词（37题的Other, 40题的her），两个接近于是固定搭配的介词（33题的as, 39题的for），关键在于理解句意。

分析三：

37题填where得1.5，填Other得1.0分。平时我们没有1.0分的说法，更不用说做法了。

分析四：

语法填空要求严格区分大小写，原因是有前后文，而听取信息是填表格，对大小写的区分相对不是很严格。

反思一：

如果说2007届高考老师们心里没底，主要是由于对考纲研究不够透彻，不够准确，从07高考英语样题中可以看出，每空只能添一个单词。因此，认真研究考纲样题，剖析考纲样题，把握考纲样题，是我们所有高中英语教师的是十分必要的。

反思二：

更重要的是，平时训练命题，选材，选资料可以更慎重，仔细看看是否符合新高考的

命题细节标准。

注：单词拼写错误，大小写未区分不给分。

语法填空专项练习（1）

In the United States, there were 222 people ____1____ (report) to be billionaires(亿万富翁) in . The __2_of these is Bill Gates, worth at least $ 41billion, who made his money ____3___starting the company Microsoft. Mr. Gates was only 21 years old ___4_he first helped to set up the company in 1976. He was a billionaire __5__the time he was 31. __6_, there are still some other people who have made lots of money at even ___7__(young) ages. Otheryoung people who have struck it rich include Jackie Coogan and Shirley Temple. ___8_ of these child actors made over a million dollars ___9____ (act) in movies before they were 14. But ___10___ youngest billionaire is Albert von Thurn und Taxis of Germany, who, in , inherited (继承) a billion dollars when he turned 18!

(2)

Finishing their shopping at the mall, a couple discovered that their new car ____1_____ (steal) .They filed a report____2____ thepolice station and a detective drove them ____3___ to the parking lot to look for evidence. To their ____4____ (amaze), the car had been returned ___5_ there was a note in it that said: “I apologize for taking your car. My wife was having a baby and I had to rush her to the__6__. Please forget the inconvenience. There are two tickets ____7____ tonight's Mania Twain concert.” Their faith in humanity restored. The couple attended ____8____ concert. But when they returned home, they immediately found ____9_____ their house had been ransacked (洗劫). On the bathroom mirror was ____10_ note: “I have to put my kid through college somehow, don't I?”

(3)

People __1__(live) in different countries made different kinds of words. Today there are about fifteen hundred __ 2_ in the world. Each contains many thousands of words. A very large dictionary, for example, contains four ___3_ five hundred thousand words. But we do not need ____4___ these. To read short stories you need to know only about two thousand words. ____5___ you leave school, you will learn only one thousand or more. The words you know are called your vocabulary. You should try to make your vocabulary ______6__ (big). Read as many books as we can. There are a lot of books _____7____ (write) in easy English. You will enjoy them. When you meet _____8__ new word, look it ____9____ in your dictionary. Your dictionary is your _____10_____ (much) useful book.

(4)

When you are in England you must be very careful in the streets ____1____ the traffic drives on the left. Before you cross a street you must look to the right first _2___ then the left. In the morning and in the evening when people go to or come from __3____, the streets are very busy. Traffic is most ___4___ (danger) then. When you go by bus in England, you have to be careful, ____5____. Always remember the traffic moves on the left. So you must be careful. _____6____ (have) a look first, or you will go ____7____ wrong way. In many English cities, there are big buses ____8_____ two floors. You can sit on the ______9____ (two) floor. From ____10_____ you can see the city very well. It’s very interesting.

(5)

__1 artist had a small daughter. Sometimes he painted women ___2__ any clothes on, and he and his ____3___ always tried to keep the small girl out____4___ he was doing this, “She is ____5_____ young to understand,” they said. But one day, when the artist ____6____ (paint) a woman with no clothes on, he forgot to lock the door, and the girl suddenly ran into the room. He mother ran up the stairs ___7__ her, but when she got to the room, the little girl was already in the room and looking at the woman. _____8___ her parents waited for her to speak. For a few seconds the little girl said ____9____, but then she ran to her mother and said ____10_____ (angry), “Why do you let her go about without shoes and socks on when you don’t let me?”

(6)

Most Americans don’t like to get advice ____1___ members of their family. They get advice from “_2___(strange)”. When they need advice, they don’t usually go to people they know. __3_ many of them write letters to newspapers and magazines ___4 give advice on many different subjects ____5___ (include) family problems, the use of language, health, cooking, child care, clothes, ____6___ even on how to buy a house or a car. Most newspapers ____7__ (regular) print letters from readers with problems. Along with the letters there are ____8_ written by people who are supposed to know how to solve such problems. Some of these writers are doctors, ____9____ are lawyers or educators. But two of the most famous writers of advice are women without special ____ 10___ (train) for this kind of work.

(7)

Without proper planning, tourism can cause_____1____. For example, too many tourists can crowd public places ___2____ are also enjoyed by the inhabitants(居民) of a country. If tourism create too much traffic, the inhabitants will become ___3__ (annoy) and unhappy. They begin to dislike tourists __4__ to treat them impolitely. They forget how much tourism can help the country’s economy. _____5____ is important to think about the people of a destination country and ___6__ tourism affects them. Tourism should help__7__ country keep the customs and beauty that attracts tourists. Tourism should also advance the wealth and ___8_____ (happy) of local inhabitants. Too much tourism can be a problem. If tourism __9__ (grow) too quickly, people must leave other jobs to work____10_____ the tourism industry. This means that other parts of the country’s economy can suffer.

(8)

Why is setting goals so ______1____? Because goals can help you do, be, and experience everything ____2____ you want in life. Instead ___3____ just letting life happen to you, goals allow ____4_____ to make your life happen. ____5_____ (success) and happy people have sets lots of goals to help them reach their aims. By setting goals you aretaking control of your life. It’s __6___ having a map to show you ____7____ you want to go. Winners in life set goals and follow through with them. Winners decide what they want in life and then get there by making plans and _____8___ (set) goals. Unsuccessful people just let life happen by accident. Goals aren’t difficult to set, and ____9____aren’t difficult to reach. It is up to you to find out what your goals really are. You are ___10_one who must decide what to do and in what direction to aim your life.

参考答案 :

(1) 1 reported 2 richest/wealthiest 3 by 4 when 5 by

6 However 7 younger 8 Both 9 acting 10 the

(2) 1 had been stolen 2 at 3 back 4 amazement 5 and

6 hospital 7for 8 the 9 that 10 another

(3) 1 living 2 languages 3 or 4 all 5 Before 6 bigger

7 written 8 a 9 up 10 most

(4) 1 because 2 and 3 work 4 dangerous 5 too 6 Have

7 the 8 with 9 second 10 there

(5) 1 An 2 without 3 wife 4 when/while 5 too

6 was painting 7 after 8 Both 9 nothing 10 angrily

(6) 1 from 2 strangers 3 Instead 4 that/which 5 including 6 and 7 regularly 8 answers 9 others 10 training

(7) 1 problems 2 that/which 3 annoyed 4 and 5 It

6 how 7 a 8 happiness 9 grows 10 in

(8) 1 important 2 that 3 of 4 yourself 5 Successful

6 like 7 where 8 setting 9 they 10 the

语法填空补充练习（共25篇）

语言结构1（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Elephants are the biggest animals ___1____ live on land. Some whales are bigger than elephants ___2___ whales live in the sea. When ___3____ (bear), a baby elephant ____4___ (weigh) about 91 kilograms. That is the weight of a ___5___ (grow) man. It is about 91 cm high. At the age of six, it is about 183 cm high. It is not until it reaches the age of 12 that it ___6___ growing. It may be 320 cm high. African elephants are bigger than Indian elephants. African elephant have much bigger ears. Elephants have very long noses ___7____ we call trunks. Elephants have longer noses than any ____8___ animal. The elephant can use ___9___ trunk to smell things and it can pick up things ____10___ the tip of its trunk. The tip of its trunk can be used like a hand. Can you do that like an elephant?

语言结构1参考答案

1.that 2 but 3 born 4. weighs 5 grown

6 stops 7 which 8. other 9. its 10 with

I．语言结构2 （共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

If the population of the Earth keeps on ____1____ (increase) at its present rate, there will ____2____ (event) not be enough resources left to support life on the planet. By the middle of the 21st century, if present trends continue, we ____3____ (use up) all the oil that drives our cars, for example. Even if scientists develop new ways of feeding the human race, the crowded conditions on Earth will make it ____4___ for us to look for open somewhere else. But ___5___ of the other planets in our solar system are capable of supporting life at present. One possible solution to the problem, ___6___, has recently been suggested by an American scientist, Professor Carl Sagan. Sagan believes that ____7____ the Earth’s resources are completely ____8____(exhaust) it will be possible to change the atmosphere of Venus and ___9___ create a new world almost as large as Earth itself. Something is difficult. Venus is much hotter than the Earth. ___10___, there is only a tiny amount of water there.

语言结构2参考答案

1. increasing 2 eventually 3 will have used up 4 necessary 5 none

6. however 7 before 8 exhausted 9 so/therefore 10. Besides

I．语言结构3（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

On the coast of Cuba ___1___ an old fisherman. He was thin and had many deep lines in the back of his neck. His skin was very brown, and his ___2___ were marked by pulling heavy fish at the end of ropes. But all these marks were old. Every part of him seemed old ____3___ his eyes. These were cheerful and the same color ___4___the sea. For 84 days the old man did not catch any fish. People said that he was ___5___(luck). ___6____the old man still loved the sea. He was still strong and a good fisherman. On the 85th day the old man sailed farther out to the sea than ___7___ of the other boats. He sailed to ___8___ the water was very deep. Then he felt fishing-line ___9____(pull）gently by a big fish which ___10___(swim) very deep in the water.

语言结构3参考答案

1. lived 2. hands 3. except 4 as 5. unlucky

6 But 7. any 8. where 9. being pulled 10. was swimming

I．语言结构4（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Dolphins ____1____（become） a popular attraction at zoos in recent years. They are more interesting than lions and tigers ___2____ they are livelier and perform tricks, like circus animals. But ____3____（连词）they are more willing to cooperate with the trainer than other mammals in captivity, they get bored if they ___4___ (ask) to do the same trick twice. This is one reason ___5___ believing that they are very intelligent.

Dolphins are regarded as the friendliest creatures in the sea and stories of them helping ____6___(drown) sailors have been common ___7___ Roman times. We now have more reliable evidence of their ___8___ (use) than sailors’ tales. In South Africa, two dolphins have been trained to help swimmers ___9___ difficulties and drive sharks___10___ from the beach.

语言结构4参考答案

1. have become 2 because 3. although/though 4 are asked 5. for

6 drowning 7 since 8. usefulness 9 in 10 away

I．语言结构5 （共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Is it possible for people to live on Venus in the future?

____1___ the experiments are successful, life will become possible there. ___2___ it will not be pleasant at first. ___3____ they go to Venus, the first colonists will have to take plenty of water with them and get used to days and nights ___4___ (last) 60 earth-days. But there will also be some ____5___. The colonists will live longer because their hearts will suffer ___6___ strain than on earth. ____7_____ that, they will be exploring a new world while ___8___ still on earth are living in closed, uncomfortable conditions. Perhaps, it will be the ___9____ way to ensure the ___10___(survive) of the human race.

语言结构5参考答案

1 If 2 But 3 When 4. lasting 5 advantages

6 less 7 Apart from/ Besides 8 those 9. only 10 survival

I．语言结构6（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Increasingly, over the past 10 years, people---especially young people---have become aware of the need ____1____（change）their eating habits, ___2___ some of the food they eat, particularly ____3___(process) foods, is not good for health. Therefore , there has been a growing interest in ___4___(nature) foods: foods ___5___ chemical additives and unaffected by chemical fertilizers, widely used in ___6____(farm）today.

It is significant ___7____ nowadays fiber is considered to be an important part of a healthy ___8___. In white bread, for example, the fiber has been removed. But it is present in unrefined flour and of course in vegetables. It is interesting to note that in countries ____9____ the national diet contains large quantities of unrefined flour and vegetables, certain diseases are comparatively rare. Hence the emphasis ___10____ (place) on the eating of wholemeal bread and more vegetables by modern experts on ‘health eating’.

语言结构6参考答案

1. to change 2 because 3 processed 4 natural 5 without

6. farming 7. that 8. diet 9. where 10. is placed

I．语言结构7（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Natural foods, for example, are vegetables, fruits and grains grown in soil ____1___ is rich in organic matter. In simple terms, this means that the soil has been nourished ___2___ unused vegetable matter, which provides it with essential vitamins and minerals. ___3___ in itself is a natural process compared with the use of chemicals and fertilizers, the main purpose of ___4___ is to increase the amount---but not the ___5____ ---of foods ___6___ (grow) in commercial farming areas. Natural foods, scientists believe, are healthier and safer.

Natural foods also include animals which have been allowed to feed and move freely in healthy pastures. Compare this with ___7___ happens in the mass production of poultry: there are battery farms, for example, where thousands of chickens live crowded together in one building and ___8____(feed) on food which is little ___9___ than rubbish. Chickens kept in this way are not only ___10___(taste) as food; they also produce eggs which lack important vitamins.

语言结构7参考答案

1. that 2. by 3 This 4 which 5 quality

6 grown 7 what 8 are fed 9. better 10. tasteless

I．语言结构8 （共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

The Second World War came in 1939. It was the war more than ____1___ else which _____2_____（quick）the development of plastics. Scientists all over the world worked harder than they _____3____ (work) before. Plastics and plastic fibers were needed by every wartime department. So it was largely ___4____ the wartime ___5____ we have so many different plastic materials today.

But will the spread of plastics mean the end of natural materials? One day, perhaps, ____6___ might happen. Artists as well as manufacturer are now working with plastics. ____7___ many people still prefer the look and feel of natural materials. The trouble with plastics is ___8____they are ---at the moment---too perfect. Their surfaces are too smooth. Two plastics ____9___ come from the same mould look exactly the same. But two objects made of wood ___10___ look quite the same, even if they have been made by machines in a factory.

语言结构8参考答案

1. anything 2. quickened 3 had worked 4. because of / thanks to / owing to 5 that 6 this 7. But 8. that 9. which 10. never

I．语言结构9（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

It is not likely ___1____ plastic fibers will ever completely take the place of natural fibers. Materials made of plastic fibers are not quite as beautiful to look at ___2___as silk, or quite as soft as wool – at least, not yet. ___3___, clothes made of pure plastic fibers do not ‘breathe’ ___4___ clothes made of natural materials --- at least, not yet! They make the ___5____(wear) feel hot and sticky. ____6___ cloth manufacturers now usually mix cotton or wool with the plastic fibers.

Perhaps we could call ____7___ the Plastic Age. Certainly more and better plastics ___8____（make）in the future. The Germans have manufactured a car which is almost completely made of plastics. The famous British engine builders, Rolls Royce, have produced an aero plane engine, made mostly of plastics. But it is nice to know ___9____for a long time ___10___ (come) sheep will continue to give us their wool, and that the cotton pickers will continue to sing their songs under the sun in the cotton fields.

语言结构9参考答案

1. that 2 as 3. Besides 4. like 5. wearer

6. Therefore/So 7. this 8. will be made 9. that 10. to come

I．语言结构10（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Sports help people to live happily. They help to keep people healthy and feeling good. ____1___ they are playing games, people move a lot. ____2___ is good for their health. ____3____（have） fun with their friends makes them happy. Many people enjoy sports by watching others play. In small town, crowds meet ____4____（watch）the bicycle races ___5___ the soccer games. In the big cities, thousands buy tickets to see a baseball game and an ice-skating show

What are your favorite sports? Is the climate hot ____6___ you live? Then swimming is probably one of your sports. Boys and girls in China love to swim. There are wonderful beaches along the seashore and there are beautiful rivers and lakes across the country. The weather is also good ___7___ swimming. Or do you live in ___8___ cold climate? Then you would like to ski. Here are many skiers in Austria where ____9___ are big mountains and cold winters. Does it train often ____10____ you live? Then kite flying would not be one of your sports. It is one of favorite sports of Thailand.

语言结构10参考答案

1. When 2. This 3 Having 4 to watch 5 or

6 where 7. for 8 a 9 there 10 where

I．语言结构11（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

There is one holiday in the year, which is completely American, Thanksgiving Day. It is the day ___1___ everyone goes back home to spend the day ___2___ his family.

___3___ is a story of Thanksgiving Day and of one’s efforts to carry on these traditions. Old Pete took his seat this day on his usual bench in Union Square. Every Thanksgiving Day for nine years Pete ____4___ (take) this same seat exactly at one o’clock, and each time the same pleasant thing had happened. ___5___ this time Pete had come here ___6___ from habit than from hunger.

Certainly today Pete was not hungry. He had just had a dinner so enormous that he could ____7___ breathe. The buttons on his ragged shirt and coat were about ___8___ (burst). He was ___9___ full of soup, oysters, roasters, roast turkey, apple pie, ice cream and a dozen other rich foods that the November breeze and the first light fall of snow ___10___(feel) cool and pleasant to his face.

语言结构11参考答案

1. when 2. with 3. This 4. had taken 5. But

6. more 7. hardly 8. to burst 9. so 10 felt

I．语言结构12（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Can you believe it? There’s a world paper shortage, there’s a national bottle shortage, and we’re running out of raw materials ___1___ timber and tin---or so the papers say. Well. I’ve just ___2___(empty) my shopping basket after my weekly shopping trip and it was full of things made from these scarce materials. Half of ___3___ I’d bought I threw away at once: all those ___4___(necessary) paper bags, plastic bags, fresh wrapping paper and old newspapers they put the food in nowadays.

You can’t ___5___ buy a loaf of bread without getting a piece of paper round it---that’s if you can find a loaf ___6___ hasn’t already been sliced and then wrapped. Supermarkets are the worst offenders. Pieces of meat are put on small plastic trays and ___7___ wrapped in polythene; cartons of cream are put in extrapaper bags at the checkout point, fruit and vegetables ___8___(pack) in plastic bags, cheese is sold ___9___(wrap) in polythene and eggs come in special cardboard ___10___ plastic boxes. Some things are double-packed by the maker: tins of fish come in small cardboard boxes, breakfast cereals are packed in plastic bags inside cardboard containers.

语言结构12参考答案

1. like 2. emptied 3. what 4. unnecessary 5. even

6. that 7. then 8. are packed 9. wrapped 10. or

.

I．语言结构13（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

One day in 1848 a carpenter named Marshall, ___1__（引导词） worked in a saw mill on the American River in California, made a remarkable discovery. He noticed some bight yellow particles in the water, bent down to ___2__ them ___2___（动词短语） and took them to his partner, a Mr. Sutter. ___3___(代词) was the beginning of the Californian Gold Rush. Sutter was a Swiss. The man had come to America some years earlier to make his fortunate（4合并为一个句子）. The governor of California had given him permission to found ___5____(冠词) settlement in the Sacramento Valley and his ___6____（determine的派生词） and energy had made him rich. He had built the mill in partnership with Marshall ___7____ (make的正确形式) use of the abundant natural resources of his land.

The news spread across America to Europe and thousands of people joined in search. Those which went by ship had to sail round Cape Horn to reach California but some chose the overland route across America and wagon trains were formed for travelers to make the journey（8改正错误）. Even then there were some who _____9______ (prepare的时态) to cross the terrible desert of Death Valley in order to reach the gold a few days ___10____（介词）the rest.

语言结构13参考答案

1. who 2 pick up 3 This

4 Sutter was a Swiss, who had come to America some years earlier to make his fortunate. 5. a

6 determination 7 to make 8 which ---who 9 were prepared 10 before

I．语言结构14（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

During World War II some men made a ship of ice. They wanted it to carry planes. This idea coming from the Eskimos who sometimes froze thick pieces of Arctic plants into the ice which they used to build their ice houses(1改正错误). _______（2代词）plant material greatly increased the strength of the ice blocks. It also prevented them from melting early in the spring.

During the early days of World War Ⅱ, the British and Americans tried mixing crushed wood material from paper mills with water and freezing it. It was very strong，they found.（3合并句子） A stick of this ____4____ (用strengthen适当的派生词填空) ice and inch thick would support the weight of six men. A sheet four inches thick would ______ a shot ____（5短语动词）a gun. It could not be cut with a single blow _____ (6介词) an axe. The wood material formed a protective blanket ______ （7引导词）stopped the ice from melting. A five-foot block of this ice was boiled in water for four days ______ ( 8连词) it melted. It _____（9用动词的适当形式填空）for weeks in ____ (10冠词) lake water at sixty degrees Fahrenheit without melting.

语言结构14参考答案

1. coming---came 2 This 3 They found that it was very strong 4 strengthened

5 stop from 6 from 7 which/that 8 before 9 was floated 10 /

I．语言结构15（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Our modern world is founded on science and on technology too, which is the application of science ___1__（介词） everyday affairs. Mostly everything we do depends on our modern devices such as automobiles, record players and TV sets(2改正错误), and ___3___（代词） in turn depend on scientific principles. Our future will depend on computers, robots, nuclear power and rockets ships, all of them only make sense if we understand science(4改为定语从句).

If a person ____5____(not understand的正确时态) what makes these things work, they might as well be magic. People without ___6__(冠词) understanding of science live in a world that makes no sense. They might say, “So what? All I want to do is make a living, have a family and look at the scenery”. This is not so easy. They may find (7合并为一句).

Surely, it will be ____8____(increase的正确派生词) important, as the years pass, for people to understand science if they are going to be expected to help ____9____(make的正确形式) intelligent decisions about how to use science to save the world and not to destroy it.

That is ___10___(引导词) it is important to study science even if one is not going to be a scientist.

语言结构15参考答案

1. to 2 Almost 3. these

4. all of which only make sense if we understand science. 5. does not understand

6 . an 7. They may find (that) this is not so easy. 8. increasingly 9 make 10. why

I．语言结构16（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

The Chinese first made paper about years ago. China still has pieces of paper which were made as long as ___1___. But paper was not made in southern Europe ___2___ abut the year 1100. Scandinavia---which now ___3___(make) a great deal of the world’s paper---did not begin to make it until 1500. ___4___ was a German named Schaeffer who found out that one could make the best paper from trees.

Paper is very good for ___5___ (keep) you warm. Houses are often insulated(使绝缘) with paper. You have perhaps seen ___6____(home) men asleep on a larger number of newspapers. We ____7____(have) paper cups, plates, and dishes for a long time. Now chairs and ___8___ beds can be made of paper. We hear. ____9___paper boots and shoes, you can wear paper hats, paper dresses, and paper raincoats. When you have used them once, you throw them away and buy new ____10___.

语言结构16参考答案

1. that 2 until 3. makes 4. It 5. keeping

6 homeless 7 have had 8 even 9 With 10 ones

I．语言结构17（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

The pyramids were built on high ground, above the highest point __1__ the Nile flood water ever reached. The pyramid builders first built a slope ___2__ the Nile bank to the place for the Great Pyramid. Making this road and preparing the ground took 10 years. After that, ___3___ (build) the great Pyramid itself took 20 years. And ___4___ was possible only because the Pharaoh of Egypt used a very large number of people for the work. Some of them were prisoners of war and other captures people. ___5___ many of them were the Pharaoh’s own people---the farmers of Egypt. ___6___ the Nile flood began in September and their fields were ___7___ water, the pharaoh’s servants ordered them to go to work at the pyramids.

By the end of the great period of pyramid building the rich country of Egypt ___8__（become）poor. Why did the Pharaohs do it? It was a time of change in their religion. At the beginning of the period, the Pharaoh ___9___ (expect) to live in his tomb after death. His life there, he thought, would be like his life ____10___ death（10合并为一句）.

语言结构17参考答案

1.that 2. from 3. building 4. this 5 But

6.When 7 under 8.had become 9. expected 10 before

I．语言结构18（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

Getting paid to talk about the World Cup is a great job. I’m not a football commentator, though just an English teacher in Japan.

I came to Japan two years ago, and didn’t think I would stay, but Japan has that effect [1]______(介词) you. People often end up living here [2]______(long) than they planned. I think it’s best to teach in a bigger city [3]______(引导词) there are other foreigners to mix with. Rather than a small town where English teachers often complain of [4]______(feel) like a goldfish in a bowl. Many people choose to live in Tokyo, of course, which is good for the nightlife factor. But I’d say that for general quality of living, cities of neither too large [5]______(连词) too small, like Sapporo where I live, are better choices.

I teach English [6] ______ (private), which means I’m my own boss. If you want to devote yourself to private teaching, it’s well worth doing a TEFL course first, because your lessons will be much better for it. The problem with private teaching is finding students. It took me a year to build up [7]______(冠词) full schedule(日程表) of private lessons. I started out teaching in schools part time.

Most of my foreign friends here work full time for big English conversation schools. The salary is fine to [8]______(动词短语). [9]But whether you can save money depend on how much going out and traveling you do here.(改正错误)

The schools are reluctant to take time off---even teachers with tickets for the England-Argentina game had trouble [10] ______ (get) the day off.

语言结构18参考答案

1. on 2. longer 3. where 4. feeling 5 nor

6. privately 7. a 8. live on 9. depend 10 getting

I．语言结构19（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

The world ____1___(run) out of oil and energy experts believe that there could be serious shortages in ten years’ time. Not only is each individual using more oil than ever before, as the standard of living in industrialized countries rises, but the population ____2___(explode) means that each year ____3___ more people will be using oil in some form ___4___ other. Until recently we took oil for granted: it seemed it would never stop flowing. It was ___5___ cheap and plentiful that the whole world came to depend on it. Government neglected other ___6____ of energy: electricity was generated from oil and power stations were fired by it. It found its way into many of the products of light industry. Many people are surprised ___7___ they learn how many items in their homes contain oil.

The increase in the price of oil has brought the world to its senses. Governments are searching for a suitable alternative, ___8___ so far in vain. They are considering ___9___ they can make better use of the two other major fuels, coal and natural gas, but they have found that ___10___ can take the place of oil in their economics.

语言结构19参考答案

1. is running 2. explosion 3. many 4. or 5. so

6. sources 7. when 8. but 9. how 10. neither

语言结构20（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Pete sat on the bench now, ___1___ able to move. He was too tired. He happened to look to the left ___2___ there in the distance he saw the Old Gentleman coming toward him. He wanted to get up and run, but he was so full of food that he stayed right there. Every Thanksgiving Day ___3___ nine years, the Old Gentleman had come ___4___ and found Pete on this same bench, and then taken him to a restaurant and bought him a ___5____ dinner. It was a kind of tradition ___6___ the Old Gentleman, __7___ had no family and lived alone, had tried to continue. The old man was tall and thin and 60 years old. He was noble looking and he always ____8___ (dress) in black. His hair was whiter and thinner than it ___9___ (be) the year before, and he leaned _____10____ (heavy) on his cane than he used to.

语言结构20参考答案

1.hardly 2. and 3. for 4. there 5. Thanksgiving

6. which 7. who 8 dressed 9. had been 10. more heavily

语言结构21（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

How much paper do you use every year? Probably you can’t answer that question quickly. In 1900 the world’s use of paper was about one kilogram ___1__ each person in a year. Now some countries use as ___2___ as 50 kilograms of paper for each person in a year. The amount of paper a country uses shows how far advanced the country is, some people say. It is difficult to say ___3___ this is true: different people mean different things ___4___ the word ‘advanced’. But countries ___5___ the United States, England and Sweden certainly use more paper than other countries.

Paper, like many other things ___6___ we use today, was first made in China. In Egypt and the West, paper was not very ___7___(common) used before the year 1400. The ___8___ wrote on papyrus; Europeans used parchment for many hundreds of years. Parchment was very strong; it was made from the ___9___ of certain young animal. We have learnt some of the most important facts of European history from records that ___10___(keep) on parchment.

语言结构21参考答案

1. for 2. much 3. whether 4 by 5 like

6. that 7. commonly 8. Egyptians 9. skin 10 were kept

语言结构22（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Only one of the ‘seven Wonders’ of the ancient world remains: the pyramids of Egypt. The ___1___(famous) of the Egyptian pyramids are the pyramids of Giza. These pyramids were built more than 5,000 years ago. The biggest of ___2___ was the ‘Great Pyramid’, the pyramid of Khufh. It was 146 meters high, and each of the four sides ___3___(measure) 230 meters and faced exactly north, south, east or west. It was made of about 2,300,000 blocks of stones, all exactly the ___4___ shape. The ___5___ of each block was about 2.5 tons.

The ancient Egyptians had ___6___ like our machines to lift heavy things. They used sledges, levers, and rollers. They were very clever ___7___ these things. The power ___8___(supply) by hundreds or thousands of men. To move a big block of stone to a position 100 meters up, they ___9___ built up a long slope from the ground to that position, then they used levers and rollers to put the block on a sledge, and many men polled the sledge ___10___ the slope.

语言结构22参考答案

1. most famous 2. them 3. measured 4. same 5. weight

6. nothing 7. with 8. was supplied 9. first 10. up

语言结构23（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

In Tokyo there are always too many people in the places ___1___ I want to be. That is the important fact for me. Of course there are too many cars. The Japanese drive very fast when they can but in Tokyo they often spend a long time in traffic jams. Tokyo is not different from London, Paris and New York ___2___ that. It is different ___3___ one wants to walk.

At certain times of the ___4___ there are a lot of people on foot in London’s Oxford Street or near the big shops and stores in ___5___ great cities. ___6___ the streets near the Ginza in Tokyo always have a lot of people on foot, and sometimes it is really ___7___ to walk. People are very polite; there are just too many of them.

The worst time to be in the street is at 11:30 at night. That is when the night clubs ___8___(close) and everybody wants to go home. There are 35,000 night clubs in Tokyo, and you do not often see ___9___ that is empty. Between 11 and 12 everybody is looking for a taxi. Usually the taxis ___10___(share) by four or five people who live in the same part of the city.

语言结构23参考答案

1. where 2 in 3 when 4 day 5 other

6. But 7 difficult 8 are closing 9 one 10 are shared

语言结构24 (共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

In the old days an Eskimo boy went out ___1___ with the men at the age of twelve. At twenty, he was an ___2___(experience) and skilful hunter. He brought home seals, birds, caribou, polar bears, and even whales. When he married, he chose a wife ___3___ was skilful in many ways, ___4___(special) in making clothes and other things ____5___ skins.

The Eskimos taught their children with great care. The old stories ____6___(tell) in words which never changed and the children had to tell them again and again ____7___ they knew them perfectly. They learned the old Eskimos songs and dances which ____8___(express) their ideas about nature and the spirit world. And most of all they learnt the skills which kept the Eskimos ____9___ in a hard land---the skills ___10___ used every part of the animals, birds and fish and the few plants and trees.

语言结构24参考答案

1. hunting 2. experienced 3. who 4 especially 5 from

6. were told 7. until 8 expressed 9. alive 10 which

语言结构25（共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分）

仔细阅读下面短文，根据上下文填入适当的词语，或使用括号中的词语的适当形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡上标号为1-10的相应位置。

Many small ___1___ (culture) groups live in places far away from modern cities. Some of these tribes have never had any communication outside of their small geographical areas. When they do contact the outside world, their lives usually change. ___2___(learn) how to change ___3___ losing the best of their own cultures is a problem for them. How can primitive cultures learn to live in a technological world? How can they do this without becoming ___4___?

One native tribe in New Guinea has a difficult situation. The people of the tribe ___5___(pull) in two ways. First of all, copper has been discovered under the land ___6___ they have lived for centuries. ___7___(develop) want to take the copper out of the ground, to mine it. The tribe needs the money ___8___ a copper mine would bring. The problem is that the copper is directly under the ___9___ (important) buildings of their society. These buildings are a necessary part of their religion. How can the copper ___10___(mine) without changing the group’s religion?

语言结构25参考答案

1. cultural 2. Learning 3.without 4. lost 5. are being pulled

6. where 7. Developers 8. that 9. most important 10. be mined

篇9：新课标高三一轮课本复习教学案 Unit 4 Astronomy(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Unit 4 Astronomy: the science of the stars

Part 1 Topic vocabulary

Vocabulary revision

There are approximately four hundred million _________银河系 in the ______宇宙. We can see only a small part of our galaxy.

There are over three billion stars in____________银河. The sun is one of the stars. There are nine ________行星(Mercury水星,Venus金星 the Earth地球Mars火星Jupiter木星 Saturn土星Uranus 天王星Neptune海王星 Pluto冥王星) around the sun.

The Earth is the third planet from the sun. The Earth has one natural_________卫星--moon. The moon is only a quarter of the size of the Earth.

Shenzhou V

Chinese people have been dreaming of going into____________外太空 ever since before. China had ____________发射three ___________________无人飞船successfully from to . On Dec. 31, ,the launch of the fourth spacecraft “Shenzhou IV” was another big success and the spacecraft returned to the earth safely on January 5, 2003. During its flight, seven scientific experiments were carried out. The purpose of the flight was to make preparations for the launch of a manned spacecraft next time. The successful launch and return show that China is able to send a person into space soon. In 2003,the first manned spacecraft Shenzhou V was sent into space successfully. And the Chinese dream has come true.

Special report: China launches first lunar orbiter

BEIJING, Oct. 24 (Xinhua) -- Testing operators have started leaving the __________（发射塔） in the Xichang ____________________（卫星发射中心）, where China's first lunar probe Chang'e-1 will _____________（点火起飞）at around 6:00 p.m. on Wednesday. In a building about 3 km away from the tower, technicians in the remote control center are uploading the flight programs into the carrier rocket Long March 3A. Meanwhile, the 5th platform of the launching tower has been unfolded.

Part 2-3 Language points

Practice/Warming-up

按要求写单词

v n v n

direct ________ ____________ permit ___________

impress ______________ digest _____________

protect ______________ cooperate ______________

n adj. n adj

_________ sad sugar __________

_________ curious humour ______________

patience ___________ independence _____________

origin _____________ nation _________________

agriculture ____________ society _________________

Europe __________ energy _____________

___________ possible

II. Important phrases:

从方框中选择合适的词组并用其正确形式填入句子中，使句子意思完整。

prevent ... from cheer (sb./sth.) up n time depend on/upon get the hang of fall over in time think of ….as…

1. Laws have been passed to____________ people_______ killing wild animals.

2. If you catch the early bus , you will get there___________.

3. The students_________ their English teacher ______ a good guide.

4. He knew he could ____________ her to deal with the situation.

5. The good news of our football team winning the game ___________ everybody who heard it.

6. Not many people seem to______________ this new kind of music.

7. I rushed for the door and_______________ the cat in the hallway.

III. Important sentences:

Water had already disappeared from planets like Mars or satellites like the moon, but it stayed on the earth. This is how the earth began to show its special qualities.

This is how ...表示“这就是……如何……”，其中how引导的是一个表语从句，用于说明方式。类似的结构还有：this is because ..., this is why ..., this is what ..., this is when ..., this is where ...等,分别用于说明原因、结果、事物、时间、地点等。请比较：

Mary failed in this exam. __________________________________________.

(说明原因)

玛丽之所以没通过这次考试，是因为她此前病了两个星期。

The fog is too heavy this morning._______________________ (说明结果)

今天早晨雾太大，我们只好慢慢开车。

The young man left school in .______________________

(说明时间)

那个年轻人离开了学校，也就在那一年他参了军。

2. Whether life will continue on the earth for millions of years to come will depend on whether this problem can be solved.

句子中两个以whether引导的从句均为名词性从句, 前者是主语从句，后者是宾语从句。在引导宾语从句时通常既可以用if也可以用whether（介词的宾语除外）, 但是引导主语从句、表语从句或同位语从句时通常多用whether而不用if。如：

Henry asked___________________________________ (宾语从句)

亨利问他那时是否可以上网。

I worry about___________________________（作介词宾语）

我担心是否伤害了她。

Her question is whether humans will be able to live on Mars.(表语从句)

她的问题是人类将来能否在火星上生活。

______________________________ doesn’t matter at all. (主语从句)

布莱克先生与会与否无关紧要。

3. “If you are right, my mass will be less than ...!” (Using Language)

mass在此意为“质量”，是不可数名词，但有时可与不定冠词连用。如：

This particle has a very small mass. 这种粒子的质量很小。

mass还可用于a mass of 或masses of，通常有以下两种意思：

(1)表示“一团，一堆，一块”。如：

There were masses of white clouds in the sky. 天上有朵朵白云。

There is a mass of snow in the yard. 院子里有一堆雪。

(2)表示“大量，大批”，可修饰可数名词或不可数名词。如：

_________________ are coming to see the exhibition. 大批人要来看展览。

I’ve_____________ to do. 我有大量工作要做。

IV Homework

句子翻译

1. 令我们中国人骄傲的是我们可以成功发射载人宇宙飞船。(主语从句和表语从句)

2. 阻止大气污染是我们应尽的责任。(prevent...from)

3. 我一直想掌握天文学方面的知识。(get the hang of)

4. 我不想太多地依靠父母。(depend on)

5. 有机会看到神州五号的发射，我感到很幸运。 (have a chance to)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

书面表达

最近，你班同学就“太空探索是否值得”这一话题展开了一场讨论。请你根据下表提供的信息，用英语写一篇短文介绍讨论的情况。

30%的同学认为： 70%的同学认为：

1. 不值得探索

2. 离我们及我们的日常生活太遥远

3. 浪费金钱。这些金钱本可用来解决地球上的饥饿、污染等问题 1. 值得探索

2. 已使用卫星进行通讯传播、天气预报

3. 有望解决地球人口问题、地球能源短缺问题

注意： 1. 词数：120左右； 2. 参考词汇：短缺 shortage。

One possible version:

Recently, students in our class have had a discussion on whether space is worth exploring.

________________________________________________________________

Part 4 Grammar------主语从句

主语从句可以按其引导词的不同分为三类：

第一类，用从属连词that引导的主语从句，例如：

That we shall be late is certain.

That the driver could not control his car was obvious.

这种结构主要是对that从句的内容进行强调，属正式文体，连词that不可以省略；但是在一般情况下，往往使用先行it结构，即用it作形式主语，而把that从句放到后面，这时，在口语中，连词that有时则可以省略。所以上述两句可以改为：

___________________________________

__________________________________________

如果整个句子是疑问形式，就只能用先行it结构，例如：

Is it true that he would take the risk？

Is it possible that they will come tomorrow？

常使用先行it结构，用that从句作主语的句子有下列几个句型：

1、It + be + 形容词 + that从句：

It is clear that he was telling the truth.

________________________________ 我们可能会稍微迟一些。

2、It + be + 名词词组 + that从句：

It’s a pity that you can’t go with us.

3、It + 及物动词 + 宾语 + that从句：

It shocked me that Peter didn’t tell anybody where he was.

___________________________________________________

她的头发正在变成灰色让她有些担心。

4、It + be + 过去分词 + that从句：

It is said that he has been there many times.

5、It + seem/happen/appear等不及物动词 + that从句：

It seems that he has lost something.

注意：

在上述第1和第2两种句型中，that从句前置与使用先行it，that从句后置在意义上没有什么差异；但使用先行it结构较为常见。

在第3种句型中，that从句前置在语法上是可能的，但实际上并不常见，通常总是使用先行it结构 .

第4种句型实质上是被动结构，由于that从句不可以位于句首作被动句的主语，所以只能使用先行it结构。

第5种句型已经形成了固定的搭配关系，that从句不能前置，只能使用先行it结构，不过，这种结构可以转换为带有不定式的简单句，例如：

It happened that I had no money with me that day.

→_____________________________________________

第二类，用连接代词who、whose、which、what，连接副词when、where、how、why，以及连词whether（或if）引导的主语从句，例如：

Who was responsible for the accident is not yet clear.

→____________________________________________

What he did is not yet known.

→ _____________________________________

Whether it is true remains a problem.

→ ____________________________________

从以上例句可以看出，这类主语从句可以直接放在句首作主语，也可以使用先行it结构，把主语从句放在后面，两种结构可以互换，意义上无差异，但用if 引导主语从句时，只能采取先行it结构，也就是说if不可以引导置于句首的主语从句。

第三类，用what、whatever、where、wherever、whoever、whichever等代词引导的主语从句，例如：

What he said at the meeting encouraged everyone.

Whoever fails to see this will make a big blunder.

MET-linking高考阅读理解练习

宁夏D

Houston, Texas (June 8, 2002) -In , the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) will send two robots (机器人) to separate places of Mars to seek out past or present signs of water. It is all exciting idea to send two robots driving over very different places of Mars at the same time, to be able to see what is on the other side of the hill.

Last month, NASA announced it was sending one robot to Mars, but after two weeks, it decided there was enough money for two. The robots will be sent up within two weeks of each other in May and June of 2003 from Kennedy Space Center. If all goes well, the two spacecraft (宇宙飞船) will touch down on Mars，after a seven-and-a-half-month space flight，on January 2 and 2O, 2OO4

The robots, each weighing 150 kilograms, can cover 100 meters per day. They are designed to be able to examine the mineral content of the soil, and their special camera will take pictures of the lands and hills Although they will be under control from Earth, the robot, are able to move more freely compared to those sent up before them.

The actual landing points have not been determined yet, but the scientists say it will be in areas where they hope to find water.

67.According to the news report, scientists plan to send robots up to Mars to ______.

A. find out whether there is water on Mars

B. see if robots can find minerals there

C. test how fast robots can drive there

D.prove that robots can work on Mars

68.How long in between will the two robots be sent to Mars?

A.1 year B.7.5 months. C.2 months. D.2 weeks.

69. One of the important jobs for the robots on Mars is to ________.

A. study the soil

B. walk everywhere

C. test the new camera

D. find a suitable landing point

70. We can infer from the last sentence that scientists _______.

A. have changed the landing points many times

B. hope to land the robots on the surface of water

C. are still working on the plan

D. know where they can find water

福建 C

Scientists have found what look like caves on Mars(火星), and say they could be protecting life from the planet’s terrible environment.

The first caves discovered beyond the Earth appear as seven anestrous black dots on the pictures sent back by NASA’s Mars Odyssey orbiter. Each as large as a football field, they may be openings into natural caves below the Martian surface.

“If there is life on Mars, there is a good chance you’d find it in caves,” said Jut Wynne, one of the researchers who noticed the features while working on a US Geological Survey Mars Cave Detection Program.

Jonathan Clarke, a geologist with the Mars Society of Australia, yesterday described the discovery as exciting.

One photo taken at night by an infrared imager(红外线成像器) showed one hole to be unusually warm, suggesting hot air trapped during the day is flowing out.

“I said:‘Wow, that’s a cave’” Dr. Clarke said excitedly. “People have been looking for these for a long time; now we have found them.”

He agreed such caves would be perfect places to hunt for life escaping from the bitterly cold, radiation-soaked(充满辐射的), dry surface.

“Tiny drops of water could collect inside,” he said. “If there are gases coming out, they could provide energy for a whole range of bacteria. A cave is also a protection from radiation; the surface of Mars is exposed to high levels of space radiation.”

The caves probably formed when tube-shaped lave flows(管状岩浆流) spread across the planet long ago. The outside of the tubes cooled, forming solid walls, while something hotter inside allowed the remaining have to flow out, forming caves.

64. What does the passage mainly talk about?

A. How the caves were formed on Mars.

B. How scientists found these caves on Mars.

C. Caves on Mars may be full of hot air or a sign of life.

D. Scientists have completely recognized the surface of Mars.

65. We can learn from the passage that .

A. water has already been found on Mars

B. the scientists found all the caves at night

C. it is certain that there is life in these caves

D. the surface of Mars is bitterly cold, radiation-soaked and dry

66. According to the passage, Dr. Clarke was so excited because .

A. such caves could provide energy for life

B. they had finally found the caves on Mars

C. such caves would be perfect places to hunt for life

D. scientists had long been looking for these caves

67. Necessary conditions for life on Mars mentioned in the passage may include .

A. lava and energy

B. water and radiation from space

C. gases and lava

D. water and protection from radiation

篇10：短文改错练习.(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

一

（A）

One afternoon my father and I go fishing on a 76.______________

riverside. We found the water was very dirty that 77.______________

we could not see the bottom. We also found some 78.______________

rubbish or dead fish flowing on the water. That 79.______________

afternoon, my father and I caught only a smaller fish. 80.______________Why do the fish in the river die? That was because 81.______________of a lot of factories along the river always 82.______________poured its waste water and rubbish into the river 83.______________

and the water got polluting（污染）. Thus, most of the 84.______________fish in the river killed. 85.______________

（B）

Ken is a young man and have a big dog and a small 86.____________ car. Last Sunday he did some shopping for hour in a 87____________ shop and then ran out and jump into a car. His dog 88.____________ came after him, but it jumped into the next one. 89.____________ Ken saw it and shouted it, but the dog still stayed 90.____________

in that car. Ken gave his key into the lock of the car, 91.____________

but the key couldn't turn on. Ken looked at the car 92.____________

again. It was not him! He was in the wrong car,93.____________

when the dog was in the right one! At last the young 94.____________

man was smiled and got into his car with the dog. 95.____________

答案：

76. go→went 77.very→so 78.√ 79.or→and 80.smaller→small 81. do→did 82. 删去第一个 “of” 83. its→their 84.polluting→polluted 85.∧were 86. has 87. hours/an hour 88. jumped 89. √ 90. at 91. put 92. on. 93. his94. while 95. was

短文改错2

Dear Elli，

I’m a senior student. I like making friend with 76. ____

people and I do my best to get on well for everyone. 77. ____

But in last week I found that one of my friends 78. ____

wrote in her English diary that she dislikes me. 79. ____

He doesn’t want to be my friend any more. Now 80. ____

she has started making fun of me because of I’m 81. ____

fat. I am kind to her but why can’t she be friend 82. ____

towards me? My other problem is trying to lose weight. 83. ____

Do I do more exercises? Use pills? And do you 84. ____

know any other way？Please give me some advices. 85. ____

Yours,

Mary

76. friend→friends 77. for→with 78. 去掉 in 79. dislikes→disliked 80. He→She 81. 去掉第二个of 82. friend→friendly 83. √ 84. And→Or 85. advices→advice

短文改错3

Something about the Internet

We are all busy talking about and use the Internet 86．______

which set up in the l960s． At first, the Internet was only 87．______

used by the government, but in the early l970’s, the banks, 88．______

universities and hospitals were allowed to use them , too． 89．______

However, computers were still very expensive but the 90．______

Internet was difficulty to us. By the start of the 1990s, 91．______

computers become cheaper and easier． 92．______

Today it’s easy to get on-line and it’s said that millions 93．______

people use the Internet every day． Send E-mail is more and 94．______

more popular among students． It has now become one of the 95．______

most important parts of people’s life

86．use→using 87．which 后加was 88．去掉banks前的the 89．them→it 90．but→and 91．difficulty→difficult 92．become→became 93．millions 后加of 94．Send→Sending 95．√

短文改错4

Jimmy was only eight years. He wanted to learn 1．________

to play the piano. So his mother found the teacher 2．________

for him. At first Jimmy was happy with the 3．________

teacher because he was too strict with him. He decided 4．________

to leave him, but his mother explained him that 5．________

if the teacher made the lessons too easily and 6．________

allow him to do as he wished, he would never learn 7．________

nothing. After thinking about this a few minutes, 8．________

Jimmy thought of that his mother was quite right. Then 9．________

the teacher taught him in two years. 10．________

．1．去掉years或将其后加old 2．the-a3．was后加not 4．√5．explained后加 to 6．easily-easy7．allow-allowed 8．nothing-anything 9．去掉of 10．in-for

短文改错5

Mr Smith, a strong man worked in a bank in England, 76__________

suddenly fell ill in last week. After some examination, his 77__________

doctor said the terrible pain was in his stomach was probably 78__________

cause by some disease. But Mr Smith believed he must have eaten 79_______

something unfit to him. Then some day Mr Smith thought 80_________

of the chemical factory which he had worked. It stood right on 81_________

the seaside. Poison flowed into the sea. People never swim 82_________

in the sea because the water harmed every things in it. The air 83_______

around was sometimes poisonous too. Mr Smith stopped thinking. 84_______

He shocked by the conclusion-the root of the illness. 85________

76．Worked改为working 77. 划去in 78.划去第一个was

79. cause 改为caused 80. some改为one 81. which改为where

82. swim改为swam 83. things改为thing 84. 85. He 后加was

短文改错6

Dear Xiao Jun,

It is four days since Mother accepted the 1. _______________

operation. She is feeling much more better now. 2. _______________

The doctors told me the operation was successful, 3. _______________

but because her old age she had to stay in hospital 4. _______________

for other two weeks. The doctors also said it was 5. _______________

unnecessary for her to do so. We expect to get 6. _______________

a full report in two and three days. Please tell the 7. _______________

good news to the rest of family as soon as possible. 8. _______________

You needn’t to come here. I’m able to look after 9. _______________

Mother by myself. Just take good care yourself. 10. ______________

1. accepted ---received 2. 去more 3. 正确 4. because of 5. other ----another

6. necessary 7.in a day or two 8. the family 9. needn’t come 10. take care of

短文改错7

After I finished my school, I began to look for a job. 76.

Now several months has passed, and I haven’t found the 77.

job I’m interested. Last Sunday morning, I received a 78.

phone call from a man naming Mr Wang. He said on the 79.

phone, “I hear you do well on your studies. I may offer 80.

you a job.” I entered into his office with a beating 81.

heart. How I wished I will go through the job-hunting 82.

talk and that he would take on me as a lab assistant. And 83.

to my surprised, what he said made me feel disappointed. 84.

That he needed was only a model. 85.

76. 去掉my 77.√ 78. interested后加in 79. naming→named 80. on→in 81. 去掉into 82. will→would 83. And→But 84. surprised→surprise 85. That→What

短文改错8

I’ve been to Hong Kong for three days now, and I’m 71.

having great time. Yesterday my friend showed me 72.

about Hong Kong. It was a very busy day, but I saw 73.

many interesting things. The first place where we visited 74.

is Hong Kong Park. After that, we walked to St.John’s 75.

Cathedral. I think it is a very old church in Hong Kong. 76.

Then we go to Victoria Peak. There we could see all 77.

over Hong Kong. It was real wonderful. After lunch 78.

we caught a bus to a supermarket. On the bus back the 79.

hotel, we both felt tired and very happy. We enjoyed 80.

ourselves very much.

71:to-in, 72:having-/\a 73:about-around 74:where-that或省略掉where 75:is-was 76:\/ 77:go-went 78:real-really 79: back-back/\to 80:and-but

短文改错9

Keep healthy is an important way of our life. A 76. ________

person has good health is more efficient(有效的) in 77. ________

carrying out their task either as a student in a school, 78. ________

a worker in an office and even a housewife at home. 79. ________

There are different way to keep healthy. It is necessary 80. ________

to have a healthy diet every day. Different kinds of 81. ________

food has different functions in building up and 82. ________

keeping our bodies strong. Other way to keep healthy 83. ________

is to exercise regularly. Learning what to relax(放松) 84. ________

our body is certainly in an efficient way to keep healthy. 85. ________

76. Keep→Keeping 77. has前加who 78. their→his 79. and→or 80. way→ways

81. √ 82. has→have 83. Other→Another 84. what→how 85. 去掉in

短文改错10

After I finished my school, I began to look for a job. 76.

Now several months has passed, and I haven’t found the 77.

job I’m interested. Last Sunday morning, I received a 78.

phone call from a man naming Mr Wang. He said on the 79.

phone, “I hear you do well on your studies. I may offer 80.

you a job.” I entered into his office with a beating 81.

heart. How I wished I will go through the job-hunting 82.

talk and that he would take on me as a lab assistant. And 83.

to my surprised, what he said made me feel disappointed. 84.

That he needed was only a model. 85.

76. 去掉my 77.√ 78. interested后加in 79. naming→named 80. on→in

81. 去掉into 82. will→would 83. And→But 84. surprised→surprise 85. That→What

短文改错11

A artist left for a beautiful part of the country 91. ___________

for a holiday and stay with a farmer. Every day 92. ___________

he went out with his brushes and painted till evening, 93.____________

and then, when it got in dark he went back to the 94. ___________

farm and had a good dinner after going to bed. 95.____________

At the end of his holiday, he wanted to pay for the 96.____________

farmer, so the farmer said, “ I just want one of your 97.____________

picture. In a week, it will all be finished. But your 98. ____________

picture will be still here.” The painter was very pleasant 99. ___________

and thanked the farmer for saying so kind things about 100. ___________

his paintings.

91. An 92. stayed 93. √ 94. 去掉 in 95. before 96. for去掉 97. but 98. pictures 99. pleased 100. such

短文改错12

Waves are beautiful to look but they can destroy 1. ___________

ships at sea, as well as houses and buildings near 2. ___________

the shore. Which causes waves? Most waves are caused 3. ___________

by winds blowing against the surface of the water. The 4. ___________

sun heats the earth, causing the air rise and the 5. ___________

winds to blow. The winds blow cross the sea, pushing 6. ___________

a little waves into bigger and bigger ones. The size 7. ___________

of a wave depends how strong the wind is, how long 8. ___________

it blows, and how heavy the body of water is. In 9. ___________

a small bay(海湾)big waves will never build up. 10. ___________

So at sea the wind can build up powerful waves. 11. ___________

A rule says that the height for a wave (in 12. ___________

meters) will usually be no more than one-tenths of 13. ___________

the wind's speed( in kilometres). In another words, 14. ___________

when the wind is blowing 120 kilometres per hour, most 15. ___________

waves will be about twelve metres.

1. look →look at 2. √ 3. Which→What 4. against→over 5. rise→ to rise 6.cross→across 7. a little→little 8. depends→depends on (upon) 9.heavy→large (big) 10. √ 11. So →But 12. for→of 13. one-tenths→one-tenth 14. another→other 15. blowing→blowing at

短文改错13

Mr． Fox lived close a large clothing 76． ＿＿＿＿

shop． For a long time he had meant to buy some 77． ＿＿＿＿

of the clothes． Before doing so， he keep a close watch 78． ＿＿＿＿

at the shop for several days． As the shop was in 79． ＿＿＿＿

an old building with chimneys（烟囱）， so he decided to 80． ＿＿＿＿

get into the shop through one of the chimney． One 81． ＿＿＿＿

dark night long after midnight， he climbed onto a 82． ＿＿＿＿

roof of the shop． But he went down one chimney， 83． ＿＿＿＿

he got stuck and could neither climb down or up． 84． ＿＿＿＿

He shouted for help but there had no one in the shop． 85． ＿＿＿＿

76．close后加 to 77． buy→steal 78． keep→kept 79．∨

80． 去掉so 81． chimney→chimneys 82． a→the

83． he前加when 84． or→nor 85． had→was

短文改错14

Attention， please！ I’m sorry to tell you that the visit to 56． ＿＿＿

the country， that we planned for this morning， will 57． ＿＿

be put off until tomorrow because the rain． This morning 58． ＿＿

we will visit a middle school， where has a history of 85 59． ＿＿

years． This afternoon we’ll visit the industry exhibition， from 60． ＿

which many new products are in show． Some of them 61．

won nation prizes for invention． The bus will wait for 62． ＿＿＿

us at the gate of our hotel at a half past eight． Please be 63． ＿＿＿

there on time． Don’t forget to bringing your things you need 64． ＿＿

with you． If you had any questions， you can ask me． Thanks． 65． ＿

56． ∨ 57． that → which 58． because 后加of 59． where→ which

60． from → in 61． in → on 62． nation → national

63． 去掉a 64． bringing →bring 65． had →have

短文改错15

It is late in the evening． There was a knock on the 56． ＿＿＿

door． I opened it and found a young man wore dark 57． ＿＿＿

glasses． He said he was a friend of my brother． I didn't 58． ＿＿＿

remember my brother had such friend， but I had to let 59． ＿＿＿

him in． As we talked， I found that he knew something 60． ＿＿

about my brother． I came to the conclusion （结论） that 61． ＿＿＿

he was telling the truth． Just then my brother came 62． ＿＿＿

out and the stranger was taken by surprise． I caught 63． ＿＿＿

hold of the man while my brother rang up to the police． 64． ＿＿＿

In fact he was only a thief from other town nearby． 65． ＿＿＿

56． is→was 57． wore→wearing 58． brother→brother’s

59． such后加a 60． something→nothing 61． ∨ 62． was后加not 63． out→in／back 64． 去掉to 65． other→another

Once more， three men bought seventeen apples． The 56． ＿＿＿＿＿

first man wanted one half； the second， one three and 57． ＿＿＿＿＿

the third one， one ninth． It was possible to divide 58． ＿＿＿＿＿

those seventeen apples like they wanted． Just as they 59． ＿＿＿＿＿

didn’t know how to do， a small boy came up with an 60． ＿＿＿＿＿

apple on his hand． The boy said，“Don’t worry about 61． ＿＿＿＿＿

that． Let me divide it for you．” First of all， with his 62． ＿＿＿＿＿

apple added to them， he made the number apples 63． ＿＿＿＿＿

eighteen． Then he gives nine to the first man， six to the 64． ＿＿＿＿＿

second man and two to the third man． He gave away 65． ＿＿＿＿＿

seventeen in all and took his own for himself． These men

were very thankful tothe boy． They all said ，“How clever

a boy he is ！”

56．去掉more 57．three →third 58． possible→impossible

59． like→as 60． how→what 61． on→in 62． it→them

63． number 后加 of 64． gives →gave 65． √

Different people speak different language， 76．＿＿but sports have a language of its own． A football 77．＿＿player from Japan can not play with a player from 78．＿＿England． One does not need to understand the language 79．＿＿of the other． The game speaks for themselves． 80．＿＿Peoples who do not know each other often become 81．＿＿friend after they have played together． The new 82．＿＿boy or girl in school quickly become one of the 83．＿＿class after few games． People in different parts of 84．＿＿the world learn to understand one other through sports． 85．＿＿＿＿

76． language → languages 77． its → their 78．去掉not 79． ∨ 80． themselves → itself 81．Peoples → People 82． friend → friends 83． become→becomes84． few 前加 a 85． other → another

Dear Ron,

I am very exciting to hear that you are coming to 76._________

our school soon. Now let me to introduce our school 77. _________

to you. Our school is a famous school with long history. 78. _________

We have many experienced teacher and excellent equipment. 79. _________

There are two teach buildings, one is for seniors and the 80. _________

other is for juniors. There are two lab building and 81. _________

a library. Except Chinese, maths, English, physics and 82. _________

chemistry, we have some electives (选修课). The 83. _________

students can choose that they like to attend. We 84. _________

love our school. I am looking forward to meet you soon. 85. _________

Yours,

Li Hua

76. exciting→excited 77. 去掉to 78. with后加a 79.teacher→teachers

80. teach→teaching 81. building→buildings 82. except→besides 83.√

84. that→what 85. meet→meeting

篇11：Unit 3 Australia(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Ⅰ.Words and Phrases

valley,beyond,fix up L.9 Four

skills

rather than L.10

camp,ash,dirt,cave,thirst L.9

Three

skills

faith,elder,curiously,starve,thus L.10

birth,give birth to,precious,fence,task,outdoors,shave,

argue L.11

ashtray,Bonny,kangaroo,sunburnt L.9

Two

skills

aborigines,Kooris,system,spiritual,hand down,

underground,percentage L.10

koala,Alaska,dingo,round up L.11

Italy,Italian L.12

Ⅱ.Everyday English

Be careful!

Don't throw your cigarette out of the window.

You mustn't smoke while you are walking around in the bush either.

Look out!

Don't tie it to that old branch.

Take care.

Ⅲ.Grammar

Learn the usages of the v.-ing Form as Object Complement and Adverbial.

Ⅳ.Language Use

Using the learned language, teachers and students should complete the tasks of listening, speaking and writing in the textbook and the workbook. Reading texts “The Discovery of Australia” and “Australia” should be exactly understood. Students should understand the discovery of Australia, the history, geography and local customs in Australia.

Ⅴ.Teaching Time: Five periods

Background Information

Something about Australia

Australia, officially called Commonwealth of Australia, is the smallest continent and one of the largest countries on earth, lying between the Pacific and Indian Oceans in the Southern Hemisphere(半球). It has an area of 7.7 million square km and a population of nearly 19 million. The principal religion is Christianity, with Roman Catholics and Anglicans(英国国教) predominating (占主要地位). The capital is Canberra, a beautiful gardened city.

Australia is separated from Indonesia to the northwest by the Timor and the Arafura seas; from Papua New Guinea to the northeast by the Torres Strait; from the Coral Sea Islands Territory (in the Coral Sea), also to the northeast, by the Great Barrier Reef; from New Zealand to the southeast by the Tasman Sea; and from Antarctica to the south by the Indian Ocean.

Until the late 20th century the Australian population was remarkably homogeneous (同种族的) , as a result of a previous policy of restricting non-European immigration. The restrictive policies were gradually abandoned in the 1960s and 1970s,and there has been much immigration from areas outside of Europe, particularly from Asia.

Australia has been inhabited（居住）by Aborigines（土著）for at least 40 000-and perhaps as many as 60 000 years. They immigrated from Southeast Asia, and estimates of the size of the Aboriginal population at the time of European settlement in 1788 range from 300 000 to more than 1 000 000. There is some evidence of a Chinese Landing at the site of Darwin in 1432, and Makasarese seamen(印尼望加锡渔民) began to fish the waters off Arnhem Land sometime before the 18th century. Widespread European know the knowledge of Australia, however, began only with the explorations of the 17th century.

The Dutch landed in Australia in 1616 and, under such notable seamen as Abel Tasman continued their explorations until 1644, when Australia became known as New Holland. The British arrived in 1688 under William Dampier, but they did not launch a large-scale expedition until James Cook's historic voyage of 1770 that resulted in Britain's claim to Australia and formal possession of New South Wales with the establishment of the small colony of Sydney Cove within Port Jackson(1788).From the outset, British immigrants（移民）were transported to the colony.

Tasmania, the next settlement, received settlers, from Sydney as early as 1803, and colonists arrived in Western Australia in 1827. By 1859 the colonial nuclei（核心）of all of Australia's six states had been formed.

Since World War Ⅱ Australia has assumed a leading role in Asian and Pacific affairs. Although it experienced some setbacks, the Aboriginal movement grew in strength from the 1960s, and Aborigines succeeded in obtaining rights to some tribal lands. Environmentalists also began to exercise considerable political influence.

Because it's millions of years since Australia was separated from the other continents of the world-as a result of crustal movement（地壳运动）, of course, many of the wild living things in this country are quite different from those in other parts across the globe. For example, it's the home of pouched mammals（有袋目哺乳动物）such as kangaroos and koalas. The koala, an animal looks like the bear but much smaller, lives on the leaves of eucalyptuses, also unique of Australia. There are many other living things characterists of（……特有的）Australia or Oceania- platpuses（鸭嘴兽）, echidnas（针鼹），casuarinas（木麻黄树），etc.

异域风情

Sydney

悉尼位于澳大利亚东南沿海，风光旖旎，气候宜人。它以悉尼歌剧院独特的建筑而闻名于世。在这里你会看到许多古典欧式建筑与设计新颖的现代建筑融为一体。

Sydney, the capital of New South Wales（新南威尔士州）, has a population of more than three million. It is not only Australia's oldest and largest city but also its chief manufacturing(生产) centre and business port（港口）as well as the largest centre for selling wool in the world.

Besides, Sydney is also a city with 30 golden beaches nearby. In sydney if you say you are going skiing, it often means water-skiing. If you are going to Kosciusko（科修斯科山）, you are probably going snow-skiing.

The harbour of Sydney is spanned（跨越）by the famous arch bridge and over looked by dramatic new Sydney Opera House. The Opera House has great white curving（弧形的）roofs and is described as one of the great buildings in the 20th century.

There are old classic buildings in Sydney as well, such as James Church（圣詹姆斯教堂）, Hyde Park Barracks（海得公园营房）and Parliament House（国会大厦）.Of course there are also modern skyscrapers.

It is estimated（估计）that by the end of the 20th century there will be five million people living in the metropolition（大城市）complex along the coastline north and south of Sydney.

1.派生法：通过在词根上加前缀(prefixes)或后缀(suffixes)构成新词。

建议：围绕单词词根进行词性转换，扩大词汇量，奠定英语阅读词汇基础。

(1)dirt(n.)脏物

［派生］dirty(adj.)肮脏的［规则］后缀-y接于名词后构成“……的”。如：

cloud(n.)-cloudy(adj.) wind(n.)-windy(adj.)

snow(n.)-snowy(adj.) rain(n.)-rainy(adj.)

(2)precious宝贵的

［规则］后缀-ous构成表示“……的”。如：

danger-dangerous(危险的) humor-humorous(幽默的)

mountain-mountainous(多山的) poison-poisonous(有毒的)

(3)Italy(n.)意大利

［派生］Italian(adj./n.)［规则］后缀-ian构成表“……的人”。如：

Christ-Christian(基督教徒) music-musician(音乐家)

politics-politician(政治家) India-Indian(印度人)

(4)percent(n.)百分

［派生］percentage 百分率［规则］后缀-age构成“集合”“状态”的名词。如：

bag-baggage(行李) short-shortage(短缺)

2.发散思维法：辐射一词多义，掌握词中词，提高阅读能力。

建议：先学习语言结构，后结合例句加以应用，再回到划线部分加以领悟，即运用意群记忆法。

(场所)在……那边

(1) beyond (prep./adv.) (时间)超出

(程度)超出，为……所不及

如：The house is beyond the bridge.房子在桥的那一边。

Don't stay out beyond 10 o'clock at night.晚上10点后不要在外面逗留。

Your works are beyond all praise.你的作品叫人赞扬不尽。

你来试试：

［填空］What he has done is ____________(出乎意料). (beyond expectation)

修理、安装

(2) fix up

安排(住宿)，提供

如：They fixed up a simple operation table on one end of the room.

他们在房间的一头搭起了一个简单的手术台。

They are fixing up the light.他们正忙着装灯。

Can you fix up a meeting in a hotel? 你能在饭店安排一次会议吗？

You can ask your father to fix you up with a good bike.

你可以请求你爸爸给你提供一辆好的自行车。

intend…for 打算给……

(3) intend to do 打算做

intend sb.to do 打算让某人做

如：He intends to study abroad next year. 他打算明年到国外留学。

He intends his son to manage the company. 他打算让儿子经营公司。

The dictionary is intended for the children. 字典是给孩子用的。

熄灭，关灯

(4) put out 发布新闻

生产

伸出

如：You can put out cigarette in the ashtray.你可以在烟灰缸把香烟捏掉。

Be sure to put the light out before you go away.你离开前务必将灯关掉。

The publishing house put out 80 new books last year.那家出版社去年出版了80本新书。

From then on the Romans began to put out a great variety of coins.

从那时起，罗马人就发行种类更多的硬币了。

He put out his hands to take mine.他伸出手来拉我的手。

The government will put out a new statement next week.政府将在下周宣布一项新声明。

depend on/upon 依靠、取决于

(5)

That(all)depends/It(all)depends 视情况而定

如：You can never depend on your parents.你不能永远依靠父母。

I may help you,but that depends.我也许会帮你，但得视情况而定。

3.辨析法：辨别相近易混结构，学会他们的区别。

建议：先学习辨析结构，后回到例句中加以分析应用，再领悟划线部分，破解难点。即运用意群记忆法。并运用观察分析法对比记忆。

如：I found a place suitable for the party.我找到了一个适于聚会的地方。

Do you think this style suits me?你觉得这种款式适合我吗？

These shoes don't fit me.这鞋我穿不合适。

The new manager isn't fit for his position.新经理不胜任这项工作。

切记：(sth.)fit sb.某人穿……合适

你来试试：

［改错］His great height fited him for team games last year.(fited→fitted)

outdoor(adj.)户外的，反义词indoor

(2)

outdoors(adv./n.)户外，反义词indoors

如：After class, the students prefer outdoor sports.下课后，学生们喜欢户外运动。

Children usually prefer playing outdoors.孩子通常喜欢在户外玩。

give birth to 生产、生下

(3)

be born 出生

如：His wife gave birth to a son.

The town gave birth to great men.

She was born on May 2nd.

He was borne by Eve.

小结：give birth to 其主语为雌性，其宾语一般为牲畜或婴儿。也可用比喻意义。

be born其主语是人或动物。也可用引申义。如跟有by短语则用borne。

你来试试：

［改错］On a rainy day,she was born by her poor mother.(born→borne)

如：His elder brother is a PLA man.他哥哥是解放军战士。

He is my elder by several years.他大我几岁。

The elders handed down the customs.长辈们把风俗传了下来。

你来试试：

［填空］She is three years ____________ than my _____________ sister. (older, elder)

4.联想归纳法：用已知语言结构进行广义联想，归纳总结。再回到意群中加以领悟。

(1)go camping 去露营

联想go+v.-ing，得到：

go boating 去划船

go cycling 去骑自行车

go hunting 去打猎

go farming 去务农

go soldiering 从军

go nursing 当护士

go climbing 去爬山

go riding 去骑自行车

go teaching 从教

go dancing 去跳舞

注意：go+v.-ing结构多指从事体育娱乐活动;也表示从事某职业。

(2)hand down传下来

联想动词hand有关词组：

hand in(上交)

hand out(分发)

in hand(手里的)

by hand(用手做)

hand over(移交)

hand back(交还)

on the other hand(另一方面)

at hand(在手边的，即将到来的)

如：I always keep a dictionary at hand.我常把字典放在手边。

Her sweater is knitted by hand.她的毛衣是用手打的。

Money in hand is not enough,so you can't buy the computer.

手头的钱不够，所以你不能买计算机。

(3)curiously 好奇地

联想curiously 得到：

如：Children are naturally curious about everything around them.

孩子们对周围的每件事好奇是自然的。

I'm curious to know what is written in his letter.我极想知道他信中写了什么。

It's curious that he should have failed to win the race.他没赢得比赛真奇怪。

Curiously enough,he seems to have known what we should do next.

说来奇怪，他几乎已经知道我们下一步做什么。

注意：It is curious that…从句用虚拟语气。

公式为：should do(should可以省略)

(4) catch sb.doing 碰上某人做某事

be/get caught in 被……围困

catch up with 赶上

联想动词catch,得到：

catch hold of 抓住

catch one's attention 吸引某人的注意

如：The girl was caught stealing the apples.这个小女孩在偷苹果时被当场抓住。

He was caught in the storm on his way to school.他在上学的路上遇上了暴风雨。

(5)keep out 不让……进来

联想动词keep搭配的词组：

keep up 维持、保持

keep off 避开

keep in mind 记住

keep on doing 反复不断做

keep pets 养宠物

keep back 抑制(情感)

keep away from 远离

keep up with 赶上

如：The trees keep out the wind.这些树可以挡风。

Keep off the grass.勿踏入草地。

The heavy rain kept them from going out.因为下大雨，他们没能出去。

I'm glad you're keeping up your studies.我很高兴你在坚持学习。

你来试试：

They try to keep ________________ the same speed.

A.out B.up

答案：B

the remaining language 相当于the language left

(6) 不及物动词，剩余、留下

remain

系动词，仍然、依然

如：The children ate and ate until no food remained on the table.

孩子们吃个不停，直到桌子上的东西吃个精光才肯罢休。

The problem remained unsettled.这个问题仍旧未解决。

用作不及物动词时译为“剩余、留下”

小结：remain 用作系动词时译为“仍然”

作定语时用remaining形式

rather than的几种用法

1) rather than此处是介词短语，意思是“与其”、“不是”，相当于instead of。如：

I think you, rather than Mary, is to be punished.我认为该受惩罚的是你，而不是玛丽。

Rather than fish, we'll have fried eggs and meat for lunch.

今天午餐吃煎蛋和肉，而没有鱼。

The colour seems green rather than blue.这颜色看上去是绿的，而不是蓝的。

I always prefer starting early, rather than leaving everything to the last minute.

任何事情我总是喜欢早点做，不要到最后。

I'll have a cold drink rather than coffee. 我要喝冷饮，不想喝咖啡。

2)rather than可以和would连用，如would rather…than…或would…rather than…这时要注意“平?quot;问题，即其前后必须用相同的语法单位。如：

I'd rather have the red one than(have)the green one. 我宁愿要红的，不愿要绿的。

I'd take the slowest train rather than go there by air.

我宁可乘坐最慢的火车也不愿坐飞机去那儿。

He would rather walk than drive. 他宁愿步行不愿开车。

I'd prefer to go in August rather than in July. 我愿八月去，不愿七月去。

I'd call her hair chestnut rather than brown. 我宁愿说她的头发是栗色，而不是棕色。

【注意】I'd rather +动词原形，通常意为”我宁愿……“，相当于”I'd prefer to…“，具有选择意义，即”宁愿做……不愿做“。但是，当后接动词like, enjoy, appreciate时，rather是一个程度副词，象quite和fairly一样无选择意义，所以I'd rather like不是”我宁愿喜欢“，而是”我相当（很）喜欢“。试比较下列句子：

①”I'd rather like a cup of coffee.“ ”Oh, would you? I'd rather have a beer. “

”我很想来杯咖啡。“”噢，是吗？我宁愿喝杯啤酒。“

②We would rather appreciate your help. 我们非常感谢你的帮助。

③Which would you rather have, tea or coffee? 你更愿意喝什么，茶还是咖啡？

④He would rather enjoy seeing a film on Sundays. 他很喜欢在星期天看场电影。

3）在would rather前后可用不同的主语来表示某人宁愿让另一个人做某事，这时，一般用过去时来表示现在或将来要做的事。如：

”Shall I open a window? “”I'd rather you didn't.“

”我开一扇窗好吗“”你最好别开。“

Don't come tomorrow. I'd rather you came next weekend.

明天别来，我希望你下周末来。

I'd rather you told me the truth. 我宁愿你给我讲实话。

I'd rather you went home now. 我愿意让你现在就回家。

4）谈到过去的动作，用过去完成时。如：

I'd rather you hadn't done that.我真希望你没做过那件事。

I'd wish you had answered the question. 我真希望你回答了这个问题。

I'd rather you hadn't done that. 我希望你没做过那件事。

二、知识归纳

（一）catch 高考常考动词之一，其主要用法如下：

1.(出其不意地)碰上，撞上（某人做某事，多指不好的事），作及物动词用。

（1）后接带现在分词的复合宾语：catch sb.doing sth.

e.g.She caught him smoking.ニ撞上他抽烟。

He caught some boys stealing flowers from the garden.ニ发现几个男孩在花园里偷花。

（2）后接名词/代词+介词短语

e.g.I caught the boy at it again.ノ矣肿采险夂⒆釉诟烧馐隆＊

We shall catch them in the middle of their supper.ノ颐侨セ崤錾纤们吃晚饭。

2.撞上、碰上（多用于被动结构）：be/get caught in…

e.g.The ship was caught in a hurricane.ツ撬掖遇上了飓风。

On my way home yesterday,I was caught in the rain.プ蛱煳以诨丶业耐局杏錾嫌炅恕＊

3.赶上，抓-

e.g.They caught us before we reached town.ノ颐腔姑挥械酱锍抢铮他们就赶上我们了。

I want to catch the one-thirty train.ノ蚁肴ジ弦坏惆氲幕鸪怠＊

I caught him by the arm.ノ易プ×怂的胳臂。

What?I didn't catch that(what you said).ナ裁矗课颐惶清楚。

（二）intend的主要用法归纳

1.intend用作及物动词，打算，有……意图

（1）接不定式

e.g.I can't do it,and don't intend to.ノ也荒苷庋做，也不打算这样做。

Do you intend to make a long stay there?ツ愦蛩阍谀抢锎舫ぢ穑开

（2）接动名词

e.g.We don't intend doing it this year.ノ颐墙衲瓴淮蛩阏庋做。

（3）接从句

e.g.He hadn't intended that we should all be there.ニ没有意思让我们都到那里。

（4）接复合宾语

e.g.Let's ask him what he intends us to do.ピ勖侨ノ饰仕打算让我们怎么办。

The building was intended to be a museum.フ庾建筑物本来是打算用作博物馆的。

（5）接名词或代词

e.g.They intended no harm.ニ们没有恶意。

2.intend…for… 打算给某人……，打算使……成为……

e.g.They intended the chair for you,but she took it away.

这把椅子他们是打算给你的，但是她搬走了。

This gift is intended for Xiao Hong.フ饫裎锸亲急父小红的。

（三）fix up的用法归纳

1.安排

e.g.Please fix up time for an interview.デ氚才藕靡桓黾面的时间。

We'll fix him up in the hotel.ノ颐墙把他安排在那个宾馆。

2.修理

e.g.He is fixing up the broken chair.ニ在修理那个破椅子。

3.搭起

e.g.That night we fixed up a bamboo bed for him in the front room.

那天晚上我们给他在前屋搭了一张竹床。

4.解决

e.g.We have fixed up the matter now.フ馐孪衷谖颐且丫解决了。

（四）round up的用法

round up 聚集、召集，相当于：gather together,可以用作及物动词，也可以用作不及物动词。

e.g.They rounded up at the school gate.ニ们在校门口集合。

I rounded up a lot of students to help me.ノ艺偌了好多学生来帮我的忙。

（五）rather than的用法

（1）是……而不是……，通常连接两个名词、代词、形容词、副词、动名词、介词、谓语动词，用来将前后两种情况加以对比。

e.g.He is a doctor rather than a worker.ニ是医生而不是一名工人。

She is honest rather than clever.ビ肫渌邓聪明，还不如说她老实。

连接两个主语时，谓语和前面的一个一致。

e.g.Tom,rather than you,is to blame.ジ檬茉鸨傅氖翘滥罚而不是你。

（2）would rather…than…/would…rather than…

e.g.I would take the train rather than go there by bus.

=I would rather take the train than go there by bus.我宁愿乘火车也不愿坐公共汽车去那儿.

（3）rather…than otherwise 不是别的，而是

e.g.It is rather cold than otherwise.ヌ旎故峭冷的。

三、词语辨析

1.be born,give birth to

(1)sb.be born in/on/at/of/from… 出生于……

e.g.She was born in a city. 她出生在一个城市里。

The boy was born of/in/from/into a poor peasant family.

那个男孩出生于一个贫穷的农民家庭。

(2)be born+n. 生来就是，天生就是……

e.g.No one is born a teacher.ッ挥腥松来就是老师。

(3)give birth to 生，产生

e.g.She gave birth to a fine healthy baby.ニ生了一个漂亮健康的宝宝。

The Chinese nation has given birth to many heroes.ブ谢民族涌现了许多英雄。

2.older, elder

二者都是old的比较级，但用法不同。old用于人时指年龄更大，用于物时指更旧;elder只用于比较同辈人中的年龄大小，只用作定语。

e.g.My elder brother is five years older than I.ノ腋绺绫任掖5岁。

This table is much older than that one.フ庹抛雷颖饶钦啪伞＊

3.outdoor,outdoors

outdoor是形容词“室外的”，多用作定语；outdoors是副词“室外（地）”“户外（地）”，在句中作状语。它们的反义词分别是：indoor（室内的）和indoors（室内地）。

e.g.He often sleeps outdoors in summer.ハ奶焖常在室外睡。

We need more outdoor exercise.ノ颐切枰更多的户外活动。

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.Good health depends,of course,________________a number of factors.

A.to B.upon C.for D.with

2.I'd like the red silk dress ________________ that black one if you let me choose.

A.and not B.rather than C.more than D.than

3.We put a fence ________________ the vegetable to keep the chickens ________________.

A.round;in B.around;out C.over;out D.on;in

4.-Do you regret paying so much money for the book?

-No,I would gladly pay ________________ for it.

A.three times as many B.three times so much

C.three times as much D.three as much time

5.-Did they receive you well?

-Yes,they ________________ in a good hotel.

A.fixed up us B.fixed us up C.gave us up D.put up us

6.-Is there any present for me?

-Of course.This book ________________ you.

A.is given for B.is to be given for C.is intended for D.is intended to

7.The cowboy________________ the cattle that ________________ eating the grass here and there.

A.drove up;was B.picked up;were C.rounded up;was D.rounded up;were

8.-Where shall we ________________ tonight?

-I think the clearing near the river is a good place.

A.camp B.stay C.live D.sleep

9.The ________________ diamond is ________________.

A.valuable;curious-shaped B.valuable,curious-shaping

C.precious;curiously-shaped D.precious;curiously-shaping

10.Australia ______ almost one third of the world's sheep.Cattle are also ____,fruit and vegetables are ______ in it.

A.produces;kept;grown B.keeps;grown;produced

C.grows;produced;kept D.produces;grown;kept

11.The peasants ________________ the majority of the population in China.

A.are make from B.make up C.make up of D.are make of

12.One strange animal ______eggs,yet feed its young ________ its milk.

A.lay;on B.lays;on C.laid;with D.laid;on

13.He would take the slowest train ________________ by air.

A.rather than going B.rather than go C.rather go D.prefer to go

14.The students in Class Two are planning ________________ in the summer holidays.

A.going camp B.going to camp C.to go camp D.to go camping

15.What is ________ price to one person ______ worthless to another.

A.behind;maybe B.behind;may be C.beyond;maybe D.beyond;may be

16.The soldier rushed into the railway station ________________.

A.with a gun in hand B.with gun in hand

C.gun in hands D.gun in hand

17.-I'd like to go to the cinema with you,Dad.

-Sorry,but the film is ________________ for adults.

A.admitted B.intended C.promised D.permitted

18.Twelve of the students gave performances,and the ______ ones served as the audience.

A.left B.rest C.remained D.remaining

19.No dictionary can _________ all the English idioms.

A.cover B.tell C.say D.show

20.The painting looks better if seen ________________ distance.

A.in a B.in the C.at a D.at the

1.B depend upon/on 取决于。 2.B rather than 而非。

3.B keep the chickens out 不让鸡进来。 4.C 省略句。 5.B fix up 安排住宿。

6.C be intended for 意指。 7.D round up 赶拢，cattle 是集合名词。

8.A 9.C 10.A 11.B make up 构成 12.B

13.B go与take 构成平衡结构。 14.D plan to do 计划做某事;go camping 去露营。

15.D 16.D gun in hand 相当于with a gun in his hand 17.B

18.D the remaining ones 相当于the ones left 19.A 20.C at a distance 隔有一段距离。

语法天地

复习归纳v.-ing(现在分词)的用法。

(1)现在分词的形式：见下表

以及物动词ask,不及物动词go为例。

(2)分词的时间意义

①现在分词的一般时表示的动作，与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生或几乎同时发生。如：

One day I found a boy playing on the track.

②现在分词的完成时表示的动作，发生在谓语动词动作之前。如：

Having cleaned the desk,we began reading.

(3)现在分词的否定式：not+v.-ing

(4)现在分词的作用

现在分词在句中起形容词和副词的作用。

①作定语：单个分词作定语常放在被修饰词的前面。分词词组作定语放在被修饰词的后面。如：

He was waiting for the sleeping boy.

Do you know the man sitting over there?

切记：having done 分词的完成时永远不能作定语。

［误］Do you know anyone having told lies?

［正］Do you know anyone who has told lies?

②作表语

如：The story that I read yesterday is very touching.

③作补语

I'm sorry to have kept you waiting.

切记：分词作补语与宾语或主语的关系：分词作宾语补足语，分词的逻辑主语就是句子的宾语;作主语补足语时，分词的逻辑主语就是句子的主语。

现在分词与逻辑主语间是主谓关系。

分词与不定式作宾补的区别：

现在分词与宾语有逻辑上的主谓关系，并表示动作正在进行。

动词不定式与宾语有逻辑主谓关系，表示动作全过程已经结束。如：

I feel my heart feeling fast.(强调动作正在进行)

Did you hear anyone come in?(强调动作的全过程)

④作状语

A.分词短语作时间、条件、原因、让步状语时，多位于句首，可转换成状语从句;作表示结果、方式、伴随情况状语时，通常置于句末。如：

Working in the factory, we learned a lot from the workers.(时间状语)

Being too old, he couldn't walk that far.(原因状语)

Standing on the building,you can see the whole city.(条件状语)

Being young, he knows a lot.(让步状语)

Many trees had been blown down by the high winds, blocking roads.(结果状语)

One woman was lying in bed, awake, listening to the rushing wind.(伴随状语)

B.分词作状语与谓语动词的时间关系。

现在分词表示的动作与谓语动词表示的动作同时进行。现在分词的完成时先于谓语动词的动作而发生。

注意：逻辑主语是分词解题的钥匙，一般说来，现在分词的逻辑主语就是句子的主语。即分词与句子的主语存在逻辑上的主谓关系。

分词与逻辑主语的关系如下表

但几个常用的词组不受这种语法限制。

generally speaking(一般的来说) strictly speaking(严格的来说)

roughly speaking(粗略的来说) judging from(由……来看)

如：Generally speaking,newspaper follows the American way.

Judging from his accent,he must be from Shanghai.

(5)分词与从句/独立主格结构的区别

①从句的结构为：关联词(after,before,since,as…)+主语+谓语。如：

After I had put down my newspaper,I walked over to the window and looked out.

②分词是短语，无关联词(但可保留when,while,if,though…)如：

When leaving the airport,they waved again and again.

③独立主格为短语，无连词但有逻辑主语和逻辑谓语，逻辑谓语由非谓语动词承担。如：

Weather permitting,we'll go to the Great Wall.

(6)独立主格结构

独立主格结构在句中作状语。一般说来，表示时间、原因、条件时常放于句首。表示方式或伴随放于句末。

①表示时间 如：The work finished,they left the room.=After the work was finished,…

②表示原因

如：It being a rainy day,Kate wore her new raincoat=Because it was a rainy day,…

③表示条件 如：Weather permitting,we'll visit the Great Wall.=If weather permits,…

④表示方式或伴随情况

如：The family started on their way,children running and jumping in front.

独立主格结构的构成

①名词(代词)+不定式或分词 如：The clock having struck 12, I went to bed.

注意：being\,having been的省略：being\,having been在名词作逻辑主语的独立结构中可以省略。如：Class(being)over, we began to have a break.

His work(having been)finished, he went home.

但代词作逻辑主语时，being\,having been不可省略。如：

They being our friends,we should help them.

你来试试：

［改错］He stood there with his eyes fixing on the ground.(fixing→fixed)

It fine, we went out for a walk.(fine前加being)

②名词(代词)+形容词/副词/介词词组 Summer over, students returned to school.

③with+名词(代词)+宾补。这种句型又叫with的复合结构。如：

With his mother out,he failed to do his homework.

注意：独立结构中冠词的省略。

在“名词+介词短语”的独立结构中，如果逻辑主语与介词短语中的名词都是单数名词，在这些名词前习惯上不用冠词。如：The teacher came in,with a book in his hand(book in hand.)

你来试试：

［改错］The man was sitting over there,a pipe in mouth.(去掉a)

语法专项练习

1.The professor came into the lab,________________ by his assistant.

A.following B.followed C.being followed D.to follow

2.With trees,flowers and grass __________ everywhere my town has taken on a new look.

A.planting B.planted C.to plant D.to be planted

3.Weather ________________,we'll go fishing tomorrow morning.

A.is permitting B.permits C.permitting D.permitted

4.The key ________________,I couldn't enter the office.

A.was lost B.having been lost C.be lost D.being lost

5._______not enough money,I couldn't buy the dictionary.

A.It being B.It was C.There being D.There was

6.________________,the boy could't enter his house.

A.Since the key has lost B.The key was lost

C.Lost the key D.Having lost the key

7.If ________________ ill,I'll stay home ________________ a good rest.

A.to fall;taking B.fall;to taking C.falling;taking D.falling;take

8.A letter has been written to him,________________ him to the party.

A.invite B.to invite C.invited D.inviting

9.Not ________________ it right,he was encouraged to try again.

A.did B.done C.to do D.having done

10.________________ your head,and you'll see the sun ________________ now.

A.Raise;rising B.Raise;raising C.To raise;rising D.Lift;being risen

11.________________ from his clothes,he is not so poor.

A.Judged B.Judging C.To judge D.Having judged

12.________________ now pretty late,we took candles and went upstairs.

A.Being B.to be C.For being D.It being

13.European football is played in 80 countries, ____ it the most popular sport in the world.

A.making B.makes C.made D.to make

14.________________ a reply,he decided to write again.

A.Not receiving B.Receiving not C.Not having received D.Having not received

15.Mother ________________ the child had to live alone.

A.dying B.died C.having died D.dead

16.All the people,________________ the wounded,were brought to safty.

A.included B.including C.include D.to include

17.All the people,the wounded ________________ were brought to safety.

A.included B.including C.include D.to include

18.On my way home,I saw a thief ________________ money from a lady by police.

A.being caught B.having caught C.caught stealing D.have caught to steal

19.He stepped into his room,____ ______ a lot of things _______.

A.finding;robbed B.finding;stolen C.found;missed D.to find;robbed

20._____ ___ up at his father,he asked what was the matter with him?

A.Having looked B.Looking C.To look D.Look

1.B followed by his assistant 被助手跟随。2.B planted 表示动作完成。

3.C 独立主格结构。4.B 独立主格结构。5.C 独立主格结构。

6.D 现在分词作状语，the boy 是动作的执行者。

7.C 8.D 9.D 分词作状语。10.A 祈使句+and… 11.B judging from 是独立结构。

12.D 句子意为：天已黑，我们拿着蜡烛上楼。 13.A

14.C receive 发生在decide之前，所以用完成时;not+doing 构成分词的否定式。

15.B 16.B 17.A 18.C catch the thief stealing

19.B steal a lot of things，不可说rob sth., rob sb.of sth.是正确的。 20.B

（二）高考真题

1.(上海)__in 1636,Harvard is one of the most famous universities in the United States.

A.Being founded B.It was foundedC.Founded D.Founding

简析：选C。founded既表示了Harvard的被动（被创建），又表示动作发生在过去（in 1636）。

2.(2000上海)The ________boy was last seen________near the East Lake.

A.missing;playing B.missing;playC.missed;played D.missed;to play

简析：选A。missing是一个形容词，丢失的，下落不明的。修饰boy，句子中出现了last这个副词，表示当时的一个情景，故用分词playing而不能用play。

3.(上海)The bell________the end of the period rang,________our heated discussion.

A.indicating;interrupting B.indicated;interrupting

C.indicating;interrupted D.indicated;interrupted

简析：选A。“indicate”和“interrupt”和bell的关系都是表示主动，都用现在分词，indicating作定语，interrupting作状语。

4.(2001高考题)___such heavy pollution already,it may now be too late to clean up the river.

A.Having suffered B.SufferingC.To suffer D.Suffered

简析：选A。此题考查现在分词的用法，suffer的逻辑主语是river，表主动，因此用现在分词的完成时。

篇12：Unit 10 The trick(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Lesson 37

Step 1 Revision & presentation

A) 复习”主谓一致”: 用所给动词的适当形式填空:

1. A poet and artist__________(come) to our party tonight.

2. Mr. Green, as well as his family, _________(travel) with us now.

3. Either he or I__________(be) to attend the students’ meeting.

4. The cattle_________(feed) on the grass in the fields, when the children arrived.

5. Bread and butter__________(be) a daily food in some western countries.

6. What they need now ________(be) more experienced teachers.

7. His family___________(be) football fans.

8. The police__________(report) that the wanted man is now staying in this hotel.

9. Many a child___________(be) playing basketball on the playground.

10. Each teacher and each student________(be) expected to attend the lecture.

11. ________(be) ten minutes too short for you?

12. There__________(be) an adult and many little children enjoying themselves in the classroom.

B) Ask Ss some questions about people who disappear. Ask: What do you do if people disappear? Who do you telephone? What do try to find out? What might have happened to people who disappear?

Step 2 Reading

1. Ask questions about the picture, and get the Ss to tell you what they think is

happening.

2. Listen to the dialogue (book closed) and find out the answer to this question: What do they think has happened to Linda bell? (It looks as if she has gone away for a few days.)

3. Read the dialogue aloud, and finish Exercise 1 (p.181).

Step 3 Language points

1. turn up ( turn down, out, in, to, over, … )

1) He asked Jane to marry him, but she turned him down.

2) There was no one in the street to whom I could turn for help.

3) I didn't think he would turn up until 10p.m.

4) If you pick up anything, you should turn it in to your teachers.

5) The rumor has turned out to be false.

6) He turned the matter over in his mind, and then made a decision.

7) Would you turn up the radio a little? I can hardly hear the program.

( It's one's turn to do sth., in turn, by turns, out of turn, take turns to do)

2. may/might/must/can't have done 用情态动词表示对过去某事可能性的推测,注意其反意问句的表达方式, 以及根据语气不同选择不同的情态动词.

”I wonder why they are late.“ ”They must have missed the train.“

Jenny can't have been with him at that time, for I was having dinner with her in my home.

”What do you think of the service here?“ ”Oh, wonderful! We couldn't have found a better place.“

He might have given you more help, even though he was very busy.

He left three days ago. He may have arrived in Beijing. In other words, he may be

there now.

注意反意文句的表达方式:

It must be Mary who is in the office, isn't it?

He can't have been caught stealing yesterday, did he?

They might have been working for some thirty years, haven't they?

3. happen v.

If anything should happen to him, that would be too bad.

I wonder what's happened to him.

It so happened that I had no change on/with/about me.

I happened to have no change with me.

( break out, take place, add up to, appear, belong to, rise, cost…不用于被动态)

4. since/ever since

I have studied at this school since . ( since 是介词 )

I entered this school in 1998, and I have studied here ever since. ( 副词 )

He has lived in Beijing since he moved to the north three years ago. ( 连词)

It is a week since he arrived/smoked/stopped smoking.

汉译英：

1）他在一九七0年离家，以后即无音讯。

He left home in 1970, and has no been heard of ( ever ) since.

2）她自结婚后未回过家。

She hasn't been home since her marriage.

3）自上次见面后，你到哪里去了？

Where have you been since I last saw you?

4）你到伦敦多久了？刚好一周。

How long is it since you got to London? It's a week since I arrived here.

5. It looks/seems as if

It appears/sounds as if

6. mean, meant, meant v. means n.

mean to do sth./mean doing sth.

meant to do/didn't mean to do

be meant for

7. It's (just) like sb. to do sth. 某人(恰恰)就是…这个样子,表示赞扬或不满,若用

否定,则表示怀疑.

It's like him to leave the work to others.

It's not like him to have said anything like that.

It is like her to think of others before thinking of herself.

另外, It is likely that…/sb. is likely to do sth.

8. Obviously she's gone somewhere to stay.

Don't worry, Betty. This time I will be here to stay.

The new ideas have come to stay. （持久，继续流行，变成根深蒂固）

I hope that the principle of equality of opportunity for men and women has come to stay/is here to stay. （我希望男女机会平等的原则能持久。）

(stay single/open, stay up, stay for a meal)

9. at the back of , on top of, in (the) front of, at the bottom of, at the top of

10. She’s taken the bag that usually sits on top of the cupboard.

Sit---to lie, rest, be in a place or position and not move.常与on连用:位于，坐落在，处于某位置。

The books sat unread on the shelf for years.

这些书放在书架上未经阅读已经好几年了。

He, together with his children, lives in a village sitting on the side of a hill.

他和他的孩子们住在坐落在山腰处的村子里。

There are some family photos sitting on the writing table.

有几张家庭照片放置在楔子台上。

Lesson 38-39

Step 1 Reading comprehension

1. Listen to the story and give answers to three questions on p.56.

1) Why was Bill worried?

Two men were following him. Bill was afraid that they would try to steal something from him.

2) Where had Bill planned to travel to? Japan.

3) What was the new plan?

Mick would go to Japan instead of Bill.

2. Read the whole story, and answer questions on p.57&p.58.

3. Finish Exercise 1 on p.182 and Exercise 1 on p.183.

4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words on p.182&p.183.

5. Retell the whole story with the help of the information on p.57---Retelling.

Step 2 Language points

1. pick up

While staying in Canada, he picked up English and French. (获得，学会)

He slipped and fell, but quickly picked himself up. （跌倒后爬起）

Wait at home patiently, I'll picked you up in a few minutes. （用车接）

He picked up the waste paper, and put it in the basket. （捡起）

It is difficult for us to pick up VOA. （收听到）

You will soon pick up health when you get to the seaside. （恢复）

She is a girl I picked up in the street.（偶然结识）

pick out , pick, choose, select, elect.

pick flowers/fruit/words/one's nose/one's pocket

pick out one's friend in the crowd （分辨出）

pick out some good apples （挑选）

There are only five to choose from.

Choose your friends carefully.（审慎择友） choose husband/wife

He had to choose between death and dishonor. （两者择其一）

select a Christmas gift for the child （精选）

selected works written by Lu Xun

He was elected president of the USA in the general election.

2. as though/as if

He acted as if nothing had happened.

This American girl speaks as though she were a Chinese.

3. glance v.&n.

He glanced over his shoulder to see if he was being followed.

Will you please glance over my report before I send it to the manager?

He glanced through the letter, tore it into pieces, and threw it into the fire.

He glanced at the watch, and left in a hurry.

take a glance at the headlines at first glance

4. escape v.&n.

None of you can escape from the terrible place.

Is there any one of you escaping being injured/the injury in the accident?

His telephone number escaped me for the moment.

There have been very few successful escapes from this prison.

That is a narrow escape.

5. thought n.&v. thoughtful adj.

have a sudden thought/at the thought of / deep/lost in thought

I have no thought(intention) of hurting your feelings.

May I have your thoughts on this matter?

He says he cannot read my thoughts.

He keeps his thoughts to himself.

idea n.

I have no idea what to say next.

I have some idea of the trouble you meet with during the experiment.

What idea can a blind man have of color?

6. the last time he was in Cairo…

I made quite a lot of friends the last time I stayed in the country.

Be sure to bring me the photos of your son the next time you come here.

each time/every time/the first time/the minute/the moment/the instant

Every time I went to Beijing, I would visit the Great Wall.

I'm sure you will be struck by its beauty the minute you see it.

immediately, directly, instantly, on doing sth. 一……就……

7. in a flash 转眼间, 突然间

In a flash, he realized that I had already recognized him.

It seemed that everything changed in a flash.

news flash （简短的新闻电报）

The idea flashed into/through my mind.（掠过，闪现）

8. form v.&n.

form a child's character/mind/ideas/opinions/plans

I can't form any idea or opinion about it.

It's easy to form a bad habit, but it's difficult to get rid of it.

A good idea formed in my mind./came into my mind/was developed in my mind.

A good idea hit/seized me.

in the form of…

9. On/Upon his arrival…

On/Upon arriving at…

As soon as he arrived at…

Immediately/Directly/Instantly he arrived at…

10.with fear表示原因, 常跟表示情感的名词.

His face turned pale with fear.

The old woman was trembling with cold.

The patient was burning with fever.

She brightened up with joy.

Her eyes shone with pleasure.

We're wild with joy.

11. beat v.(beat, beaten)

He was beaten black and blue. give sb./get a good beating

Our team got a sound beating./was beaten. He beat me at chess.

The rain was beating against the window. beat the record

The sun was beating down on our heads.

12. have sth. done

They have decided to have their old house rebuilt.

When I was training in the gym, I had my leg hurt.

Tom had his hands burnt.

The robber had his head cut.

I have to have/get the plan carried out as soon as possible.

比较：have sb. do sth./have sb. doing sth./get sb. to do sth./get sb. doing sth./get

sth.done

13. by name

I know this man by name.

The teacher knows all the students in her class by name.

A person of the name of Smith wants to see you.

A person with the name Smith…

A person, Smith by name, …

A person by the name of Smith…

A person named Smith…

另外，He writes under the name of Jack Smith.

The boy was named after his father.

14. with结构.

He showed me a piece of paper, with his address written on it.

We are sure to finish the task ahead of time, with him to offer the help.

He lay there, with his eyes looking straight upwards.

Mothers in that village have to work hard in the fields with their babies on their

backs.

He likes sleeping with the windows open and the light on in summer.

15. the moment/the minute…

for a moment一会儿

for the moment眼下,暂时(for the time being)

at any moment随时,任何时候

at the last moment在最后一刻

Can I speak to you for a moment?我可以和你谈一会儿话吗？

I wasn’t fooled for a moment.我一点儿也没有上当.

I will be ready for a moment.我马上就准备好.

Be careful----he might come back at any moment.当心,他随时都可能回来.

For the moment we are content to watch and wait.目前我们甘心在一旁观察和等待.

I recognized her the moment I saw her.我一见到他就认出他来了.

He’s never late, but he often arrives at the very last moment.他从不迟到,但他常常在最后一刻赶到.

16. be perfect for sth.

The weather is perfect for an outing.

The big house is perfect for our large family.

The place is perfect for our holidays.

17. break off/down/up/into/in/out

18. force v.&n.

force open a door/force a door open

(cut/tear/burst sth. open, set sb. free, keep sth./sb. alive )

force one's way through a crowd

force sb. to work hard (into working hard)

force a smile, a forced laugh

the force of a blow/an explosion, force of character/emotion

the forces of nature

the armed forces of a country, the Army, Navy, Air Force

by force

19. flight n.

two flights of stairs

the flight into Egypt

a flight of capital

a none-stop flight from Paris to New York

a flight of swallows

20. …completely astonished.

”We've got the first place!“ we cried, greatly pleased and excited.

She accepted the gifts, deeply moved.

She hurried back home, eager to tell his family the result of the competition.

The child stole into the room, not daring to wake up his father.

21. trick

He got the money from me by a trick.

Don't try any tricks!

play a trick(tricks) on sb./dirty tricks/unfair tricks/double-dealing tricks

22. spare v.&adj.

have no spare money/time/room/parts

Can you spare me a few litres of petrol?

I can't spare the time for a holiday at present.

Spare no efforts/pains to do sth.

篇13：写作常用句型(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)

1.there be

There is a tall tree in front of our teaching building.

There are some students playing football on the playground.

2. think/find it + adj for sb to do sth

(1).I find it necessary to take down notes while listening.

(2).I feel it important to have some working experience.

(3).I found it impossible for me to work out all the problems in such a short time.

3. not…until

(1).I didn’t know the truth until she told me what happened.

(2).Yesterday I didn’t go to sleep until midnight.

4. Some…others

(1).Everyone is busy in classroom. Some are reading, others are writing.

(2).There are many foreign students in our class. Some of them are from Europe, others come from America.

5. not only…but also

(1).In just three years, she had not only finished all the lessons, but also received her doctor’s degree.

(2).Forests can not only fresh the air but also reduce noises.

6. such…that / so…that

(1).He is such a good student that everyone likes him.

(2).We were so deeply moved that we could not fall asleep that night.

7.too…to…

(1).They were too angry to say a word that day.

(2).He is too young to go to school.

8. in order to

(1).He worked very hard in order to realize his dream.

(2).In order to get there on time,we set off early in the morning.

9.be about to do sth when…/be doing sth when…

(1).I was about to go out when the telephone rang.

(2).I was walking in the street when I heard a lady cry ”Help,help“.

10.used to

(1).He used to live in Shanghai.

(2).There used to be a tree in front of my house.

11.see/hear/watch/find sb do sth/doing sth

(1).I heard someone laughing.

(2).I saw him put the key in the lock,turn it and open the door.

12. have some difficulty in doing sth/with sth

Do you have any difficulty in understanding spoken English?

13.be busy doing sth/with sth

He was busy getting ready for his journey.

练习一：根据上下文关系用连接词把下列各句连接起来，组成一个单句、并列句或复合句。

1.a) Go to see the doctor at once.

b) Your cold may get worse.

Go to see the doctor at once, or your cold may get worse.

2. a) Alice was the first to complete her paper.

b) Alice made quite a few mistakes in her paper.

Alice was the first to complete her paper, but she made quite a few mistakes in it.

3. a) We were about to start off last night.

b) The phone in the living room began to ring.

We were about to start off last night when the phone in the living room began to ring.

4. a) Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home.

b) John had to stop a car for a lift.

Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home, so he had to stop a car for a lift.

5). a) He has made great progress in his studies.

b) All the teachers praise him.

He has made such great progress in his studies that all the teachers praise him.

6. a) Some people waste food.

b) Other people haven’t enough food.

Some people waste food, while others haven’t enough food.

7. a) It’s too late to go to the cinema now.

b) I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.

It’s too late to go the cinema now. Besides, I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.

8. a) Your aunt has no other thought but what is best for you.

b) I have no other thought, either.

Neither your aunt nor I have any other thought but what is best for you.

练习二：1、用but,then,instead,the next moment,when填空：

The accident happened at 7:15 on the morning of February 8, . I was walking along Park Road towards the east when an elderly man came out of the park on the opposite side of the street. Then I saw a yellow car drive up Third Street and make a sudden right turn into Park Road. The next moment the car hit the old man. He fell down with a cry. But the car didn’t stop to save the old man. Instead，it drove off at great speed.

2、用at last,then,so,up to now,that,when填空：

Don’t Lose Your Courage

Never shall I forget the first English lesson given by Miss Liu. On that day, when she entered the classroom, we found that she was a young and beautiful lady with a big smile on her face. Then she introduced herself saying that we should call her Miss Liu instead of Teacher Liu, a moment later, she let all of us go to the blackboard and say something about ourselves in English in turn. When it was my turn, I felt so shy and fearful that I didn’t dare to say a word before the class. She came up to me and said kindly, “Don’t be afraid. I believe you can do it. Come and have a try.” My face turned red when I heard that. At last, I went to the blackboard and was able to do it quite well. She praised for what I had done. Up to now, I can still remember her words in the first English lesson: “Practice makes perfect. Don’t lose your courage when you meet with difficulties. Try on and on until you succeed.”

篇14：高一17单元教案(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

Unit 17 Great Women

浙江省黄岩中学 王精红 王晨溢 陈佩君 丁瑛 毛海晨 冯丽红 许威

教材分析

本单元中心话题是“伟大女性”。谈论了普通女性, 着重介绍了世界上不同民族、不同领域中的非凡(杰出)女性及其成就。各部分的内容都是围绕这一中心话题而进行设计的。

“热身”(Warming up) 部分呈现四幅杰出女性的照片，引出杰出女性这一话题。 要求学生说出她们的姓名及主要成就，然后通过提问和讨论，让学生了解杰出女性取得辉煌的成就必须付出艰辛这个道理，并以此激励自己。在这阶段的语言实践中可培养学生概述人物特征的能力。

“听力”(Listening)部分的内容就是一则对话，谈论old school photos 中的人物及其过去和现状。要求学生根据材料，正确记录所谈及的人物的特征、专长及现状并对陈述的句子进行正误判断。让学生通过“听”学习描述人物的形容词，为后面的“口语”部分打下基础。“口语”(speaking) 由两部分组成。一是看图描述人物，呈现了三幅不同身份女性的照片，要求学生根据照片对人物进行描述，训练学生恰当使用形容词描述人物品质的能力。二是小组活动，一个学生想出一个著名女性人物，其他学生轮流提问并通过对方回答内容推断该著名女性人物是谁，本活动旨在活跃学生思维和课堂气氛。

读前(pre-reading)部分设计了四个问题，分别是有关南极探险，南北极地理知识及两极著名动物知识，通过讨论扩大学生知识面，并为下一步阅读提供背景资料。

“阅读”(reading)部分是一位女性独自一人在南极探险的故事，讲述了“我”怎样以顽强的意志战胜困难，脱离险境。这篇文章以生动的事实教育学生要在逆境中奋起，从而培养学生耐挫的良好品格。

“读后”(Post-reading)部分设计了两种练习。第一部分是针对文章的理解，检测学生对文章理解的程度。第二部分是学生评价文中的人物，旨在培养学生概括能力，同时渗透了德育内容。

语言学习(Language Study)分词汇和语法两部分。词汇部分设计了10个语境，帮助学生加深对新词汇的理解和记忆，训练学生在语境中理解词汇的能力。指导学生养成通过语境记忆词语的方法。本单元的语法项目是主谓一致。主要是群体名词作主语的用法。如果群体名词指整体概念，谓语动词用单数形式；如指个体成员时，谓语动词用复数形式。具体包括三个步骤：1.主谓一致的语法规律和例子；供学生自主学习并探究群体名词主谓一致的变化规律。2.机械性操练，用动词的适当形式填空，检验学生自主学习的结果，强化群体名词一致规律的掌握。3.不定代词的人称指代。

学习技能(Integrating Skills)部分包括读、说、写三种，其中读说结合，通过阅读和讨论，掌握用典型事例刻画人物性格特征的写作手法，了解成功女性应具备的条件和品质，进一步培养概括能力和描写能力。叙述人物时做到观点与材料相统一，善于用具体生动的事例去表现人物。随后提供范文，要求学生会写fan letters，旨在让学生运用写作方法。

学习建议(Tips)部分向学生提供了如何描写人物的一些建议。旨在帮助学生了解描写人物的框架及文体特点。学会用生动具体的实例去表现人物，刻画人物的特点，从而培养学生的英语写作能力。

复习要点(Checkpoint)简要总结了本单元的语法重点-主谓一致。并罗列了一些常用的群体名词供学生拓展使用。最后两个问题引导学生对本单元所学的词汇作一次小结，以增强学生自主探索的学习能力。

课时安排

Teaching Plan for Unit 17 Great Women

1.Warming up, Listening and Speaking

(1)Listening

(2)Speaking

(3)Listening in Work Book

2. Talking

(1)Warming up

(2)Talking in Work Book

(3)Extended reading

3. Reading

(1)Pre-reading

(2)Reading

4. Post-reading

(1)Reading

(2)Post-reading

(3)Extended reading

5.Language Study

(1)Word Study

(2)Grammar

6.Integrating skills

(1)Reading

(2)Writing

(3)Checkpoint

教材重点和难点

1．重点单词:

inspire vt. 鼓舞、感动、激发、启示

admire vt. 赞美；钦佩；羡慕

regret. n. 懊悔，悔恨 vt. 为……感到遗憾；后悔

increase vt./ vi 增加；增大

value vt. 估价；评价；重视

threaten vt. 恐吓；威胁；预示危险

bother vt. 烦扰；打扰 vi. 烦恼；操心

generous adj. 慷概的；大方的

cheerful adj. 愉快的；高兴的

mean adj. 卑鄙的；吝啬的

warm-hearted adj. 热诚的，热心的

cold-hearted adj. 冷漠的；无情的

tense adj. 紧张的，拉紧的

miserable adj. 痛苦的；悲惨的

dishonest adj. 不诚实的

dull adj. 迟钝的；无趣的；呆滞的

optimistic adj. 乐观的

extreme adj. 极端的；极度的；偏激的

stormy adj. 暴风雨的；多风暴的；激烈的

shelter n. （U）避难；保护，隐藏 (C)避难所，隐藏处

2、重点词组：

be about to do 即将，正要做某事

around the corner 很近

struggle through 艰难地渡过

find…doing 发现---处于（状态）

increase to增加到

none of毫无，一个也没有

lie down躺下；（风）渐息

at the top of one’s voice以最大的嗓音

tie to系在，栓在

(be) in good health身体状况好，健康

put up a tent 搭起，架起帐蓬

make a decision作为决定

give up放弃

think of考虑、想起、记起

come to terms with 甘心忍受（不愉快的处境）

rise to fame 出名

lead…to… 通向，导致

3、词汇拓展：

inspire (vt.) → inspiring (adj.) inspired(adj.) inspiration(n.)

admire (vt.) → admiring (adj.) admirer(n.) admirable (adj.) admiration(n.)

value (vt.) → valuable (adj.) valueless(adj.) value(n.)

extreme (adj.) →extremely (adv.)

cheerful (adj.) → cheerfully (adv.) cheer (vt.)

4、句型结构

（1）It has often been said that life is difficult as it is.

（2）…during the next week the wind grew stronger and I found myself spending a whole day in my tent.

（3）I was moving forward over a slope that seemed safe when suddenly without warning my world dropped out from under my skis.

（4）In her television shows she makes it possible to talk about great moments and difficulties in people’s lives.

（5）I had travelled only two hours one day when the winds increased so much that I had to put my tent up before the winds became too strong.

5、重点语法

主谓一致,主要是群体名词作主语的用法。如果群体名词指整体概念，谓语动词用单数形式；如果指个体成员时，谓语动词用复数形式。主要群体名词有: band, club, company, minority, police, party, public, audience, class, government, enemy, team, group, enemy, family etc.

6、教学难点

(1)用得体的英语描写人物特征，并以生动具体的例子来佐证。

(2)引导学生学习杰出女性的优良品质，树立远大目标，勤奋刻苦，严以律己，敢于冒险，知难而进。困难时候，改变方法，或者调整方向，达到成功彼岸。

Teaching Plan

Period 1 Warming up, Listening and Speaking

Goals:

1.Train the students’ listening ability.

2.Master some words describing people and use them correctly.

Step 1 Warming up

In March, there is an important international festival. Ask and answer:

Qs: 1.What festival is it? (Women’s Day)(show a picture of Women’s Day)

2.Is there Men’s Day? (No)

3.Why is there a special festival for women?(In the old time, women were looked down upon and badly treated. By creating this festival, the government just intends to raise the women’s position in society.)

4.What will you say to your mother?(Thank you)

5.What do you think of your mother?(patient, hard-working, kind, caring, careful, etc.)

Most ordinary women like our mothers have such excellent qualities. They are worth respecting.

6.What about girls?(lovely, charming, cheerful, etc.)

Step 2 Pre-listening

Look at the photos of four girls-- Lily, Rose, Jane and Sandra. They are Alice’s old school friends. Everyone has their school days. It gives us great pleasure to look at the old school photos and talk about the old school friends. Now let’s share the pleasure with Alice and the other women.

Step 3 While-listening

Tell the students that they will be listening to a dialogue of two young women. Alice tells Lucy about her old school friends.

For Part 1, the students have to listen carefully to the descriptions that Alice gives of four of her classmates: Lily, Rose, Jane and Sandra. Look at the three questions in the chart and make sure that they understand what they should listen for.(This listening material can be divided into four parts for the four girls. The students can listen to each part twice, and then check the answers at once.)

For Part 2, students should listen carefully to the descriptions of the four women, the relations between them and Alice and their qualities. They have to fill in the blanks with the correct words.(The students should listen to the material as a whole, and then check the answers.)

Step 4 Post-listening

Well done! From the listening material, we have got some useful expressions to describe women and girls. Now let’s make a list of adjectives for describing them. The adjectives can be positive or negative. Boys give a list of positive words and girls try to give a list of negative words. Let’s see who can give as many as possible.

positive negative

strong smart honest friendly warm kind cheerful popular generous pretty hard-working pretty charming helpful optimistic warm-hearted talented learned fashionable naive caring patient responsible patient weak stupid lazy dishonest mean tense cold unkind dull cunning cruel cross cold-hearted selfish

Step 5 Picture-talking

Show Picture 1 and ask:

1.What can you see in the picture?

2.What does she look like?

3.What kind of woman do you think she is?

Ask individual students for details. Then the teacher give suggested answers, emphasizing the adjectives and useful expressions used to describe women.

Suggested answers:

Photo 1: There is a woman in an office. She’s about middle-aged and dressed in a gray jacket. She’s talking on the phone. She is holding a pen in her right hand to write down some information from the phone call. The desk she is working at is perhaps a reception desk. There’s a pile of papers on her left. There’s also a bag with sunflower seeds. There’s an empty chair beside her with what looks like a computer. There are some plants on the window sill. The woman seems to be a hard-working person. You can see that she’s very careful, because she is listening attentively, and has a pen and writing pad ready to make notes. I don’t think people like her are unfriendly, but she may be a bit cold. She could be a manager or an office worker.

Step 6 Gathering

Ask students to gather expressions used to describe this woman.

1.The woman seems to be …

2.I don’t think people like her…

3.She may be…..

4.She could be….

5.I can see that…

Besides, more expressions can be used for describing a woman. Individual students can brainstorm them, or they are presented directly by the teacher if it is difficult.

6.She seems to me to be the kind of woman who …

7.The impression (that) she makes on me is….

8.I think she is the kind of person who ….

9.She looks as if….

10.She doesn’t seem…

Step 7 Group work.

Show Picture 2 and 3. Get the students to describe them, making use of the adjectives and useful expressions. Remind the students that it is not important to describe these people as they really are, but what impressions they have of them. They may refer to the questions below:

1.What can you see in the picture?

2.What does she look like?

3.What kind of woman do you think she is?

4.What could she be?

Work in groups and have a discussion. After the discussion, the leader reports. Then the teacher gives the suggested answers:

Photo 2:

There’s a girl using a mobile phone. She’s wearing a red jacket. I can’t see her face very well. From the way she’s dressed, I think she’s perhaps a cheerful and friendly person. She might be a student.

Photo3: In Photo 3, there’s a mother feeding her baby. The baby is sitting in a special chair. The impression she makes on me is that of a woman who is friendly, caring and warm.

Step 8 Listening

You see, ordinary women have different personalities. They play an important role in different fields. Among them, some have made efforts to allivate poverty in their communities to make life better. The Women’s World Summit awards special prizes to these people, like Mrs Adetona and Mrs Zeng. Listen to the tape and hear how they earned their prizes.

Suggested answers:

1.Why do some women get the award that is talked about?

Women may get the award when their ideas or work have helped to make life better in their villages.

2.How has Mrs Adetona helped women in her village?

Mrs Adetona has helped women in her village (get loans) to start small businesses.

3.Why was Mrs Adetona’s work important?

Mrs Adetona’s work was important because with her help now more than a thousand people can take care of their families and send their children to school.

4.What did Mrs Zeng teach women in her village? Write down two things.

Mrs Zeng taught the villagers 1)how to plant potatoes, 2)how to take care of sheep and 3) how to take care of the environment by planting trees on the hills around the village.

5.What happened to Mrs Zeng in ?

In 2002 Mrs Zeng was chosen to be one of the village leaders.

Step 9 Summary

Today we’ve done some listening and speaking, especially we have learned to describe people.

Homework

Divide the students into four groups to collect information about these great women: Song Qingling, Madam Curie. Pearl S Buck, Mother Teresa, including their family and achievements.

相关网址

①www. english.upenn.edu/

②www.orlok.com/pearl/pbph7.html/

③www.achievement.org

④www. ceemast.csupomona.edu/nova/curie.html

⑤www. nobel.se/peace

⑥www. ewtn.com/motherteresa

Period 2 Talking

Goals:

1.To encourage students to express their admiration for famous women and their achievements.

2.Make the students know the fact that women should get the same opportunities as men in different fields.

Step 1 Lead-in

Yesterday we learned to describe women. Most women are ordinary women, like our mothers, aunts or sisters. However, they play an important part in our life. It has often been said that women hold up half sky. In this half sky there are some shining stars-outstanding women. Some have become very famous, but we cannot say that all outstanding women are famous. However, they are all great women. Today, we just learn about some great women.

Step 2 Picture-talking

Show the pictures of Song Qingling, Madam Curie, Pearl S Buck and Mother Teresa. Ask the students the question: What kind of people do you think they are?

Get them to use the useful expressions to describe them.

Step 3 Group work

Yesterday you were asked to search the Internet for information about them. Now you have a discussion in groups, and then your leader should give us a report. Your report may cover these questions:

1.Who were they?

2.When did they live?

3.Where were they from?

4.What kind of work did they do?

5.What are they known for?

Suggested answers:

Song Qingling married Dr Sun Zhongshan in 1915. She was the vice-president of the People’s Republic for many years. She busied herself with various welfare activities, ranging from heading the women’s Federation to a number of committees involving (orphaned) children.

Maria Curie (1867-1934) was born in Poland, moved to Paris and studied chemistry and physics there. She married Pierre Curie and together they studied radioactive materials and discovered radium. In 1911 she received the Nobel Prize in Chemistry. Her death in 1934 was almost certainly due to radiation in her work.

Pearl S.Buck(1892-1973) was born in the USA but grew up in Zhejiang Province after her parents moved to China in 1895. She first learnt Chinese and was later taught English. From 1910 to 1914 she studied in America and then returned to China. In 1931 she wrote her best-known novel, The Good Earth. She won the Nobel Prize for literature in 1938.

Mother Teresa of Calcutta (1910-) was a world famous Catholic nun. From the age of 18 she worked in India to help the poor. For more than 20 years she took care of people who were often mentally or physically disabled. She was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1979. In , she was honoured with the name of Blessed Teresa.

Step 4 Game

Besides these four great women, there must be more great women who really inspire you. Let’s play a game. Student A thinks of a famous woman, comes to the blackboard, writes the name on a piece of paper and folds it so that it can’t be seen. One of the other students begins by asking questions about her. Student A may only answer “yes” or “no”. If the answer is “yes”, the student can ask more questions. If the answer is “no”, another student gets a chance to ask questions. Keep asking questions until you know who she is.

Example: B:Is she Chinese? A:Yes, she is.

B:Is she a famous actress? A:No, she isn’t.

C:Is she good at sports? A:Yes, she is.

C:Has she ever been a world champion? A:Yes, she is.

C:Does she play table tennis? A:Yes, she does.

C:Is her name Deng Yaping? A:Yes, it is.

Some possible great women:

Deng Yaping, Miss Nightingale, Helen Keller, Madam Thatcher, Marilyn Monroe, Wu Zetian, Zhao Wei etc.

Step 5 Pre-talking

As we all know, there are many famous women in all fields, including politics, science, literature and peace. All these fields were usually occupied by men. But it has proved that women can do as well as men. They have got many prizes and achieved fame and fortune. Fans, flowers and applause are all around them. What we have seen is their success and their fame. Ask questions :

1.Do you admire them? Why?

2.Is it easy for them to reach their achievements?

3.What qualities have made them stand out?

Fame and achievements never come easy. In addition to that, the career of women is often less smooth than that of men. They have to overcome obstacles. It has often been said that life is difficult as it is. For women it sometimes seems twice as difficult.

4.Was it more difficult in the past?

In the old time, girls used to be looked down upon. They didn’t learn to read or write. When they got married, what women were expected to learn was how to “catch” husbands and then to keep them happy by running a comfortable home. They couldn’t go out to work. In modern times, great changes have taken place. Please turn to Workbook Page 95 Talking. Look at the graph.

Step 6 Role Play

The graph shows us that the number of women taking part in higher education in China is actually very high. And their members are on the rise. So if women get out of school with a high level of education, why is it difficult for them to get high-level jobs?

Suppose you are all members of a group that must decide who will be the new manager in the department store where you work. A woman has applied for this job and you discuss whether she can get the job or not. There are five roles:

1)First, there is the boss of the company.

2)Second, there is the manager who is leaving. It is his job that the woman wants to take.

3)Third, there is a colleague who will have to work together with the manager.

4)Fourth, there is a worker. The new manager will be his or her boss.

5)Finally, there is the owner of the company who will help the others to make a decision.

The students will be divided into groups of five. In each group, there are five roles. The role of the fifth student is the owner of the company who will help the others make the best decision. The boss will start the discussion. Later, ask one group to act it out.

Example:

B: Okay. As we all know M, the manager here will leave next month. So our company will hire a new staff member. We have received many letters from men and women who would like to take this job. In this meeting, we hope to make a decision whom to give the job. M, maybe you can say something first.

M: OK. Well, we all know that my job is no easy one. Therefore we are looking for somebody who is responsible and has good communication skills. There is no need to say that we are looking for somebody who is hard-working and loyal to our company. I think the person for this job must be good at dealing with people and he or she must be a real team worker. The job is difficult because sometimes there can be conflicts between staff. You have to be a strong kind of person and hold a firm stand.

B: Well. Together with the owner of the company, we have already looked at most letters and made some choices. Manager of this department is an important job in our company and that’s why I want that person to be a strong and inspiring personality. Qualities that the right person for this job should have are that he or she is friendly and warm, but also strong and smart. We are now left with two, a man and a woman. I would like to hire the man, because I think a man will do this job better. But the woman has better qualifications and although she does not have as much work experience as the man. It looks as if she could do the job well. The owner of the company has said, well maybe he can explain himself.

O: Yes. I have no preference for myself. I believe both the man and the woman could do the job very well. The things, however, I would like all of you to consider are: 1. It might be good if we had more female managers in our company, so the management team could learn more from different experiences, and 2. Most staff that the new manager has to work with are women. I know there never were any problems with X, but I have also heard that some colleagues in the department would welcome a woman in this position. We are here to hear their opinion, before making a decision.

C: Well, many of our colleagues are women and they do their jobs just as well as the men. I think it could be either a man or a woman, though I prefer we choose a woman. It is very pleasant to work with different people and because there are already so many men working as managers in the company, it might be a good idea to hire the woman.

M: Qualities that the right person for this job should have are that he of she should be honest, strong and hard-working. And as far as I can see, both men and women can have all these qualities. The most important thing is that the job gets done.

C: Sure. Maybe men and women have different ways to solve problems, but we should not say that it isn’t a good thing. I’m sure a female manager will hold her stand in conflicts and can be strong.

W: I haven’t met this person. I’m not sure whether we should take a man or a woman. I suppose if both are equal in many ways, I agree with the owner that we should take a woman. In some ways it would be easier for female staff to talk to a female manager. She might understand some problems better. I believe that women should get the same opportunities provided that she is well qualified and possesses the qualities we feel are needed. On the other hand I am sure that if everybody feels that the man is the better of the two, then we should decide to take him.

B: Well, that should not make any difference. I think the person for this job could either be a man or a woman. The qualities that the right person for this job should have are to treat all staff, men and women equally. …

Step 6 Summary

Today we’ve learnt something about some great women in the world. From what we’ve learnt we can understand that women are equal to men. If we want to succeed, we must work hard.

Just as Madam Curie says: “Life is not easy for any of us. We must work, and above all must believe in ourselves. We must believe that each of us is able to do something well and that, when we discover what this something is, we must work hard at it until we succeed.”

Homework

1.Extended reading---Read four passages about Song Qingling, Madam Curie, Pearl S Buck, Mother Teresa to get more information.

2.Search the Internet for facts about Antarctica and Arctic.

Period 3 Reading

Goals:

1.Train the students’ basic reading ability by getting to know something about a famous woman named Helen Thayer.

2.Let students have strong wills and determination if they set their goals.

Step 1 Lead-in

Show some pictures of winter scenery, the North Pole and the South Pole, etc. While asking and answering, the teacher should present some new words.

Ask Qs:

1. Are they beautiful?

2.Is it cold or hot?

3.Where is the coldest place? (The North Pole and the South Pole/Antarctica)

4.What countries are part of the North Pole and South Pole?

Countries that are part of the North Pole: Norway, Sweden, Russia, Finland, The USA, Canada, Greenland, Denmark

Countries that are part of the South Pole: Chile, Argentina, South America, Australia, New Zealand

5.What’s the weather like there?

(extremely cold, stormy, windy, 24 hours of day or night) (show videos)

6.What animals live on the North Pole and the South Pole

Some animals that live on the North Pole: polar bear, wolf, snow fox, seal, walrus, reindeer, moose, killer whale

Some animals that live on the South Pole: penguin, seal, walrus, whale

7.Why do polar bears never eat penguins?

Polar bears live on the North Pole while penguins live only on the South Pole.

Step 2 Pre-reading

1.Do you want to go there and have a look at these animals with your own eyes?

2.If you want to go there, what will you take with you? Why?(While asking and answering, teaching some new words and expressions.)

1)warm clothes 2)dark sun-glasses 3)ski/snowshoe

4)tent (put…up for shelter) 5)sled (pull… dogs) 6)ice pick

7) matches. 8)maps 9)stove 10)backpack

3.What doesn’t need to be brought? (Drinking water)

4. Will you travel alone to the South Pole?

5.If a person was alone in Antarctica, what would the person be like in your opinion?

The person should be strong, young, energetic, healthy and brave.

The person should have a strong will, great courage and determination.

It’s clear to see that being in Antarctica alone is a dangerous journey of challenge. Can you imagine a woman of 60 years old making a solo expedition in Antarctica? The woman is called Helen Thayer.(呈现图像)

Step3 Skimming

Task 1 Now please read the text fast to find out:

Did Helen Thayer finish her solo expedition? (No)

Task 2 Then show the six simple drawings in the wrong order. Ask them to rearrange the pictures in the right order.

Step 4 Scanning

Then the teacher explain each picture by asking and answering some questions. Meanwhile, some important and difficult language points in bold should be explained.

Picture Detailed Information

1 1)What did she do at 50?

2)What did she decide to do at 60?

3)When did she begin her journey?

2 1.What was the weather like?

2.How was the weather later?

3.How many hours did she travel when the winds increased?

3 1.When was her birthday?

2.How did she spend her birthday?

4 1.What happened when she was moving forward over a slope?

2.How did she rescue herself?

3.Why do you think she could rescue herself?

5 1.How did she hurt herself?

2.What did she do after the accident happened?

3.What’s the result of the accident?

6 1.What decision did she make?

2.Why did she make such a decision without regret?

Suggested answers.

Picture 1

1.She traveled to the North Pole alone.(alone:by herself.)

2.She decided to travel alone in Antarctic.

3.On Nov. 1st, 1997.

Picture 2

1.It was fine. The sun shone 24 hours a day. The wind was icy but not very strong.

2.Later it turned to be stormy weather. The wind grew stronger into a howling storm.

3.She had traveled only 2 hours one day.

Picture 3

1.It was on Nov. 12.

2.She thawed a frozen cake(一块结冰的蛋糕) over the fire, placed a candle on the top, lit it and sang “happy birthday to me.”

Picture 4

1.She fell into a deep hole and was hanging on the ropes(which were) tied to the sled.

2.It took her a long time to climb out carefully.

3.It is because of the self rescue training she had had.

Picture 5

1.She had a bad accident with the sled and hurt her leg.

2.She struggled to her knees(挣扎着跪起来) and put her tent up for shelter on her hands and knees.

3.She couldn’t stand on（stand on 用。。。。。。站立）her left leg and her head was woozy?

Picture 6

1.She decided to end the journey.

2.Because she had met the challeges（迎接挑战） of solo travel in an extreme climate and she had to think of her family.

2.Multiple choice.

1)Antarctica is another name for _______.

A.the North Pole B.China C.Russia D.the South Pole

2)Helen Thayer was born on ________

A.Nov.1,1937 B.Nov.12,1937 C.Nov.22,1947 D.Nov.1,1997

3)On the 22nd day of the expedition Helen Thayer had an accident. What happened?

A.She was attacked by a polar bear.

B.She was blown away with her tent by the storm.

C.She fell into a hole which was a few hundred feet deep.

D.She had an accident with the sled and hurt her leg.

4)What decision did Helen take after the accident?

A.She spent a whole day in her tent.

B.She waited till she got better and continued her journey.

C.She gave up and went back home.

D.She was thankful for all the training she had had.

Key:1.1.D 2.B 3.D 4.C

Step 5 Listening

Listen to the tape, and follow it. Explain some language points.

Title Para Language points

1 1.what else, but (what else would I do but…)

2.be about to do

2 1.be just around the corner

2.struggle through…

3 1.increase to…

2.threaten to do sth.

4 1.die down

2.at the top of one’s voice

5 1.tie …to…

2.be thankful to sb. for sth

6 be in good health

7 1. lying on the ice (If I lay on the ice)

2. be woozy from…

8 Wait to get better or give up?

(Should I wait to get better or give up?

Step 6 Retell

Ask the Ss to retell the text using about 100 words. Then ask some students to act it out.

Notes:

1.Make use of the pictures.

2.Use the first person to retell.

One possible version:

On November 1st, 1997, I began my solo travel to Antarctica in order to celebrate my 60th birthday. For the first days, the weather was very good and there was bright sunshine. But soon, the day was cold and stormy. I traveled slowly because of the bad weather. On Nov 12, I celebrated my birthday in a special way. During my expedition, I came across some accidents: I once dropped out from under my skis and fell into a hole; I couldn’t stand on my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground and so on. However, I overcame those difficulties thanks to my training I had had. It is an experience I shall never forget and shall value for the rest of my life.

Step 7 Discussion

（Group work）What can we learn from Helen Thayer’s solo expedition？

Suggested answers:

1)The sweetest grapes hang the highest.最甜的葡萄在最高的树梢。

2)Where there is a will, there is a way.有志者事竟成。

3)Perseverance is vital to success.毅力是成功的重要条件。

Step 8 Song.

Enjoy a song----- It’s A Long, Long Road To Travel Alone

I always thought I’d like to roam

One day I started alone

Out in this old wide wicked world

Away from friends and home

It’s a long long road to travel alone

And when the day is gone

No place to pillow my head at night

Only on the cold stone

I’ve traveled around from town to town

Now it’s time that I settled down

I’ve had my fill of rambling around

And now I am homeward bound

One day a letter came to me

And this is what it read

Come home my boy to the old homestead

Your father and mother are dead

It’s been a long road to travel alone

I wish I had never roamed

I thought I’d soon see my mother and dad

But now I am left alone

Homework

1. 假设你是Helen Thayer，请你选择下面的日期写一篇探险日记。

Nov.12,1997 / Nov.22,1997

2.Surf the internet for more information about Helen Thayer.

相关网址www.goals.com/thayer/expfrm.htm.

Period 4 Post reading

Goals:

1.To develop some in-depth understanding skills by correctly evaluating Helen Thayer.

2.To inspire students to aim high , work hard and keep on working to reach their goals. Sometimes they should find solutions or different ways to reach their goals if their results are not very good or they have difficulty.

Step 1 Lead-in

Ask some Ss to share the diaries about Helen Thayer’s solo expediton with the whole class.

Step 2 Post-reading

(Group work)

1.Do you admire Helen Thayer?

2.What kind of woman is Helen Thayer? Why?

Suggested answers:

brave It is unusual for women of her age to do things like that.

strongThe description of the terrible weather conditions and the ways she deals with her accident.

perseverantShe has the power to go on even when the circumstances or conditions are very hard.

responsibleShe demonstrates this by her good decision to stop and not risk her life after her accident.

honestThe description of her journey.

Step 3 Appreciation

(Individual work)

Ask Ss to find out the beautiful sentences which make deepest impressions on them. Then paraphrase them.

1.Another-journey of challenge and danger was about to begin.

Paraphrase: I was going to start another journey of challenge and danger.

2.I found myself spending a whole day in my tent.

Paraphrase: Suddenly I found that I had been spending a whole day in my tent.

3.I was thankful for all the training I had had.

Paraphrase: I was rescued by myself all because of the training that I had had.

4.It is an experience I shall never forget and shall value for the rest of my life.

Paraphrase: This experience will affect my life in the future.

5.Within a few minutes the winds increased to a howling storm that threatened to blow me and my tent away, but none of that happened.

6.A few days later, I was moving forward over a slope that seemed safe when suddenly without warning my world dropped out from under my skis.

notes: The sentence structures of No.5 and No. 6 should be analysed carefully and the personification should be pointed out.

Step 4 Discussion

Task 1(Pair work)

Some people think Helen Thayer is a failure because she didn’t finish her extreme travel. Do you agree? What’s your point of view?

Suggested answers:

Helen Thayer shows us that no matter whether we are men or women and no matter what age, we can set ourselves goals and work hard to achieve them. In the process of getting there. She experienced difficulties and set-backs. After a bad accident, she realized that she could not reach her goal in any possible way, or her ambition was too high for her. She gave up and go back home. It is reasonable. We shouldn’t risk our life. We can change our ways or methods to reach the goal. In a word, Helen Thayer is a success.

Task 2(Group work)

1.What about your own goals in life?

2.How will you try to reach them?

Some advice:

A.You must set goals (what you are really good at and what you most like to do)

B.In any cases, work hard and keep on working to reach your goal.

C.If your results are not very good or you have difficulty, you must think about this carefully. You have to go on or make a decision. The most important thing is to believe in yourself and not to give up too early.

Step 5 Extended reading

Read the passage about Helen Thayer--First Woman to Solo Any of the World’s Poles in order to get more information about her extreme travel to the North Pole.(show a picture of Helen Thayer with her faithful dog called Charlie.)

Helen Thayer

--First woman to Solo Any of the World’s Poles

Helen Thayer, born and educated in New Zealand enjoyed a lengthy career as an international discus thrower, representing three countries, New Zealand, the country of her birth, Guatemala, where she lived for almost four years with her husband Bill, a helicopter pilot, and then the United States. Later in 1975 she won the USA national luge championship, gained All American honours and represented the USA in luge competition in Europe. She was a cross country ski racer and instructor, a kayak racer, high altitude mountain climber and climbing instructor. She climbed the highest mountains in New Zealand, (Mount Cook), North America, (Mount McKinley), former Soviet Union, (Peak Lenin and Peak Communism). She also climbed in Mexico, and China, in addition to a multitude of the highest peaks in the rugged Cascade Mountains where she and Bill live in the Cascade foothills.

In 1988 Helen and her husband Bill, decided to create a series of educational projects for students K to 12 throughout the world.

The first project would be a journey to the North Pole. It was the barren islands, the hardy plant life, the arctic animals which have adapted to one of the world harshest climates and the sea ice which Helen would have to travel across that made her realize that this would be the place to begin the educational programs. Polar bears were her special fascination and she was not to be disappointed. This is home to one of the largest populations of Polar bears in the world.

In 1988, at the age of 50, Helen decided to walk alone to the North Pole without the aid of aircraft, dog teams or snow mobiles. She was totally unsupported. She walked and skied, pulling her own 160 pound sled filled with all her supplies. Her only companion was Charlie, a black Canadian Eskimo Husky. Charlie’s only job was to walk at Helen’s side to protect her from polar bears. He did his job well. He saved her life at least once. They were confronted by seven polar bears, one at a time, throughout the almost month- long journey of 364 miles. Helen made her way around the entire North Pole area.

She began on March 30 and finished on April 27. It was a long and lonely journey. Helen’s expedition was the only one going to the magnetic North Pole in 1988, therefore she had no warning of the ice conditions which lay ahead of her.

Then she wrote a book about her journey to the Pole titled Polar Dream with a foreword by Sir Edmund Hillary, published in the USA by Simon& Schuster.

Helen traveled most of the journey across the sea ice photographing and taking notes as she went. Because the North Pole is constantly in motion, she traveled to the area of the Pole. The Canadian Geological Survey gives expeditions, air charter services and scientists the yearly coordinate of the Pole which is the approximate center of a large area.

When Helen arrived in the area of the Pole she traveled a roughly triangular path throughout the area. Although it meant walking and skiing many more miles it was only by walking around the area that Helen could photograph and describe in her educational program, the various islands of the North Pole.

After she returned home her first job was to gather her photographs and notes into a programme of education for students K to 12. The educational programme has reached students in 38 countries. To date Helen has spoken to more than 450,000 students in schools, classrooms and school conventions.

Polar Dream is an adult book but is also popular in classrooms as a study project. Not only is the book the real life story of this historical journey but it is a factual account of this interesting place close to the top of the world.

And it is the story of a faithful dog called Charlie who traveled at Helen’s side watching for polar bears. Charlie went home with Helen and lives with three other dogs, 4 goats and two donkeys. He runs with the Thayer’s daily hikes and climbs mountains. He truly enjoys a life of luxury. As Helen will tell you, “What Charlie wants, Charlie gets”

Ask and answer some questions:

1.What did she do?

2.How many high mountains did she climb?

3.Why did she decide to make the journey to North Pole? Did her husband support her?

4.Who was her only companion on the journey? How did it help her?

5.What has become of her companion?

6.In what way did she travel throughout the area of the North Pole? Why?

7.Did she finish her journey? How long did it last?

8.What book did she write about her journey to the North Pole?

Suggested answers:

1. She enjoyed a lengthy career as an international discus thrower. She was a cross country ski racer and instructor, a kayak racer, high altitude mountain climber and climbing instructor.

2. She climbed the highest mountains in New Zealand, (Mount Cook), North America, (Mount McKinley), former Soviet Union, (Peak Lenin and Peak Communism). She also climbed in Mexico, and China, in addition to a multitude of the highest peaks in the rugged Cascade Mountains where she and Bill live in the Cascade foothills.

3. In 1988 Helen and her husband Bill, decided to create a series of educational projects for students K to 12 throughout the world. /Yes.

4. Her only companion was Charlie, a black Canadian Eskimo Husky. Charlie’s only job was to walk at Helen’s side to protect her from polar bears.

5. Charlie went home with Helen and lives with three other dogs, 4 goats and two donkeys. He runs with the Thayer’s daily hikes and climbs mountains. He truly enjoys a life of luxury.

6. She traveled a roughly triangular path throughout the area. Although it meant walking and skiing many more miles, it was only by walking around the area that Helen could photograph and describe in her educational program, the various islands of the North Pole.

7.Yes./ She began on March 30 and finished on April 27.

8. Polar Dream.

Homework:

1.Suppose you are a reporter on a magazine named “Great Women”. You’re going to write a report about Helen Thayer after the interview with her.

(Group work): Work in groups and discuss how to write the report, what to write and how to describe Helen Thayer. Then finish it.

2.Preview “Language Study”.

Period 5 Language Study

Goals:

1.To practise using some words and expressions in the unit.

2.To help the students to draw the grammar rules for Subject-Verb Agreement and put them into practice.

Step1 Game

In the last several periods, we’ve learned some new words. Let’s play a game:

Two students from each group are standing face to face. Some words are shown on the screen. One of them explains them one by one either by body language or by giving situations, the other tries to say the word by guessing its meaning. The one who guesses the most in the given time will win.

The words are as follows: generous, warm-hearted, threaten, tense, thankful, candle, miserable, cheerful, mean, shelter, slope, solo, mean, inspire, challenge, optimistic, value.

Sample situation:

T: The Wangs are my neighbours. One evening, someone knocked at my door. I opened and saw the son with a basket of ripe and nice oranges. He said his uncle had brought them a lot from the countryside and his mother wanted him to give some to me for a taste. Before I could express my thanks, he moved to the next house. The Wangs are always ready to have their neighbours share the things their relatives bring them. What do you think of the Wang’s Family? And what about their son?

S: ( The family are generous, and the son is generous, too.)

Step 2 Word Study

I. Turn toSB Page 32 Word Study Complete these sentences with the words from the box.. Some words may not be used.

II.Turn to page 97 and finish Exx 1 and 3 as quickly as possible

Step 3 Grammar

Task 1 Multiple choice

1)A library with five thousand books ______ to the nation as a gift.

A.is offered B.has offered C.are offered D.have offered

2)Growing around the lake ______ wild flowers of different colors.

A.is B.are C.was D.has been

3)Each of the hotel’s 3000 rooms ______ with air conditioning and television.

A.has equipped B.were equipped C.is equipped D.are equipped

4)Different areas of the country _______ own customs.

A.have their B.have its C.has their D.has its

5)The Olympic Games, which ______ held every four years, ______ the most important event in the world.

A.are,is B.are,are C.is,is D.is,are

Suggested answers:

1)A 2)B 3)C 4)A 5)A

Task 2 Conclusion

From the exercises we know that singular nouns are used with singular verbs while plural nouns are used with plural verbs.

Task 3 Filling the blanks with the correct verb form.

1)Our little group ______ complete again.

2) ______ your group want to stop for lunch now?

3)Our family ______ not poor any more.

4)The Smith’s family all ______ Chinese.

5)The army ______ helping to clear up after the floods.

6)The army ______ the important task to keep the peace.

7)Our class______ better than any other classes at playing basketball in our school.

8)Our class______ playing a basketball match tomorrow.

9)The team ______ going to play a match on Saturday.

10)This international organization ______ going to open an office in Beijing.

11)The government ______ to build new villages in the north.

12)The government ______ holding a meeting this evening to discuss the problems.

Suggested answers:

1)is 2)Do 3)is 4)speak 5)are 6)has 7)is 8)are

9)is/are 10)is 11)is 12)is/are

Task 4 Conclusion

From the exercises we know that Collective nouns can have a singular or plural verb. If the noun refers to a whole unit, the verb is singular. If it refers to the individual members of a unit, the verb is plural. Such collective nouns are: army, class, family, club, company, audience, committee, public, party, government, crowd, police, band, minority and so on.

Task 5 Practice

Get the Ss to make sentences with collective nouns as subjects(Show pictures of two families and two groups).

1)The whole family are watching TV.

2)His family is a big one.

3)The group are having a discussion.

4)This group is bigger than that one.

Task 6 Practice

Finish Students’ Book Page 33 Exx 1 and 2 as quickly as possible.

Step 4 Project

(Group work) Each group is asked to prepare a paper for testing Subject-- Verb Agreement.

The number of exercises should be 10, and the form is unlimited. You can refer to the exercises and checkpoint we’ve finished. Then each group exchange the papers with each other. Correct the mistakes while doing it. The best one will be printed out for your homework.

Homework

1.Read SB Page 155 Subject-Verb Agreement carefully to get more rules.

2.Finish the paper for testing Subject-Verb Agreement.

3.Finish WB Page

4.Put the sentences into English.

1) 四班正在讨论怎样学好英语。

2）每一个学生都参加了这次运动会。

3）不是他去，就是我去。

4）刘军和魏国都不来。

5）书包里有一只铅笔盒，一块手表和几本书。

6）这件事谁也不知道。

7）我们每人都知道他在想什么。

8）我们中间没有人去过加拿大。

9）他们俩都不懂法语。

10）周兰和杨蓓都爱好体育。

11）警察正在问他们问题。

12）340加660等于1000。

Suggested answers:

1)Class Four are discussing how to learn English well.

2)Every student has taken part in the sports meeting.

3)Either he or I am to go.

4)Neither Liu Jun nor Wei Guo will come/is coming.

5)There is a pencil-box, a watch and some books in the schoolbag.

6)Nobody knows anything about it.

7)Every one/Each of us knows what he is thinking about.

8)None of us has been to Canada.

9)Neither of us has been to Canada.

10)Both Zhou Lan and Yang Pei like sports.

11)The police are/is asking them questions.

12) Three hundred and forty plus six hundred and sixty is/are one thousand.

Period 6 Integrating Skills

Goals:

1To learn how to use examples to support your opinions.

2.To learn to write a fan letter.

Step 1 Pre-reading

1. There are many famous women in all fields. Let’s enjoy some pictures of them.

(Show pictures of famous women such as Deng Yaping, Miss Nightingale, Helen Keller, Madam Thatcher, Marilyn Monroe)

2. (individual work)What do you think is needed in order to be a successful woman?

(A successful woman should be intelligent, determined, hard-working, energetic, strong, responsible, perseverant and endurant.)

Step 2 Reading

As we have seen, women often experience more difficulty reaching high positions. In America and many other places it is even more difficult when people are coloured. In addition to that, people from poor, remote areas or small villages and towns also often have more difficulty in going to good schools and finding good jobs than people who have grown up in bigger cities. Today we’ll read a passage about such a black woman from a poor village in America. (Show the video of her interviewing Marilyn Monroe).But now, she is the Number One TV personality.

Step 3 Skimming

Read the passage to find out how Oprah Winfrey achieved success.

(Hard work and discipline lead to her success)

Step 4 Scanning

Task 1 Ask Ss to read each paragraph and find out the main idea for it.

Task 2 When asking for main ideas for each paragraph, the teacher ask more questions for details.

Title Para Main Idea Detailed Information

: 1

: Oprah Winfrey is not just a very successful TV Personality in the USA, She is also a woman who has inspired millions.

1)What is Oprah’s Programme about?

2)Why is Oprah Winfrey not just a very successful TV personality in the US, but also a woman who has inspired millions?

2 Her family 3) What about her family?

3 She was an extremely bright girl at school. 4)Why was she an extremely bright girl at school?

5)What did she learn from her father when she lived with him?

4 Her work experience. 6)What did she do?

7)Why is her show one of the most popular television programmes in history?

5 Oprah Winfrey’s wonderful career inspires many people to fight for success.

Suggested answers:

1)In her television shows she makes it possible to talk about great moments and difficulties in people’s lives. Her another programme about literature is popular as well.

2)Oprah Winfrey is not just a successful TV personality. She has inspired millions of people through her talk shows. She helped people by giving information about difficulties that they had in their lives and talked about things that people could not or were afraid to talk about. In that way she helped people come to terms with problems that worried them or for which they could not find solutions.

3)For her family, life seemed to hold no promise.

4)She asked her kindergarten teacher to let her go to school sooner and she also skipped the second grade of primary school. A few years later, she won a college scholarship that allowed her to go to university.

5)Hard work and discipline could lead to self-improvement.

6)Worked part-time on a radio programmeStarted working for different television stations became the host of “AM Chicago”

7)Oprah’s show is one of the most popular in history. The history of television is of course not very long. Oprah has been successful with her TV programme for more than 20 years.

After asking and answering, the teacher can present the table below for the students to have a better understanding about how Oprah Winfrey reached her success.

a successful TV personality

a woman who has inspired millions

work for television talk about /great moments/ difficulties

help / come to terms with

program about

literature / popular

win many prizes

go to university Host a talk show

AM Chicago →

The Oprah Winfrey Show for over 20 years.

a bright girl

6-14 hard won a college

scholarship

part-time job on a radio program

black

born in a poor family

skip second grades

hard work discipline self-improvement success

Step 5 Listening

Go through the passage while listening to the tape. The teacher may explain some language points.

I.difficult expressions:

1.come to terms with 甘心忍受

2.bother sb. about sth. 麻烦某人某事

3.inspiring/ inspired令人鼓舞的/备受鼓舞的

4.hold no promise 毫无希望

5.lead to…= cause 引起,导致

6.so far 到目前为止，和现在完成时连用。

7.inspire sb. to do sth. 鼓舞某人做某事

8.within reach在某人所能够得着的范围

II.difficult sentences:

1….made it possible to talk about great moments…

2.Ophrah Winfrey is a black woman whose rise to fame is an inspiring story

3.For Many women such hardship would be too heavy to bear

Step 6 Role play

(Group work) Suppose you were Oprah Winfrey. Now you are at work. You work on a radio programme. People who have something that bother them or have something they can’t talk with others often ask you for help…

Problem 1: Student A has a problem with his friend. He lost 100 yuan last week and he thought it was his new friend who took it because he was with him all the time that day. But he can’t make a check on his friend and he doesn’t want to lose his friend. He wonders what to do.

Problem 2: Student B has a problem with his parents. He thinks that what his parents say is to ask him to work hard and do well in the college entrance exams. Their goal is his son should go to key university. What they care most is his marks and his health. He is unhappy at home. In this way he can’t get on well with his parents.

Problem 3: Student C is good at singing and dancing. Of course she is pretty. She wants to be a famous singer or a film star. She wonders how she can achieve success.

Problem 4: Student D is struck by one of his classmates. He is sure he loves her. It has a very bad effect on his study. He doesn’t know what to do.

Work in groups and do the role play. Then get the Ss to act it out.

Step 7 Writing

You know, Oprah Winfrey is not just a very successful TV personality in the USA, she is also a woman who has inspired millions. She gets many fan letters every day. She enjoys reading them. Here is a letter from one of her fans(SB Page 35). Read it and go on to read tips on writing and try to find out how to write a fan letter. Use it as a model and write a letter to a famous woman you admire, and read to each other in the group.

Guided writing

假设你是好莱坞著名华裔女影星-----刘玉玲的影迷，根据下面所提供的资料，给她写封信（请不要逐字翻译）。词数：100词左右。信头已给出（不计入总词数）。

刘玉玲（英文名：Lucy Alexis Liu）1986年12月2日生于美国纽约，从小立志想成为演员。大学毕业后，边打工边为争取角色而到处试镜，不断碰壁却不气馁，终于有了回报。因演电视戏剧《艾莉的异想世界》（Ally Mc Beal）中的吴琳一角而开始令人瞩目。她在成龙的动作喜剧片《西域威龙》（Shanghai Noon）中饰演公主。接下来，因演《霹雳娇娃1，2》（Charlie’s Angels）而大红大紫，风靡全球。同时自19以来也获得了不少国际性奖项。

One possible version:

Dear Miss Liu,

My name is Emily Li. I am 17 and live in Zhejiang, China. I wish to tell you how much I like your films and your performance. I am a big fan of your work. I have seen you on TV and in movies many times. My favorite movie is Charlie’s Angels.

I really admire you and all the good work that you do. I know you had dreamed of becoming an actress since you were a little girl. After college, you took a number of different part-time jobs while waiting for your fortune. In the beginning, your acting career seemed to be going nowhere, but you didn’t give up. Your persistence slowly began to pay off. Now you are world-famous because of your hard work. I hope to be just as successful as you are when I grow up.

Good luck to you always. I wish you a lot of success in the future.

Your fan and friend,

Emily Li

Step 8 Assessment

(Group work)Exchange the writing with the group members according to the following criteria for the content

1)Does the writer follow the format for informal letters?

(address +date at the top, opening and closing)

2)Does the letter give enough detail about the writer’s hero and his or her work?

1) Does the writer express his or her admiration?

Each group recommends one letter to show to the class.

Homework:

1.Finish reading the Integrating Skills on the workbook..

2.Go over the whole unit and do self-assessment. .

3.Surf the Internet about Oprah Winfrey.

相关网址：

www.galegroup.com/free-resources/bhm/bio/winfrey_o.htm.

www.oprah.com.

本单元语言点:

Warming up

1. It is said that…据说

It is said that he has gone abroad.

He is said to have gone abroad. 据说他已出国。

He is said to go abroad. 据说他将出国。

He is said to be writing a new book. 据说他正在写一本新书。

2. inspire vt.鼓舞，激发

We’re trying to inspire him with confidence. 我们正努力鼓舞他的自信心。

The present excellent situation inspires us to win still greater victory. 目前的大好形势鼓舞我们去争取更大的胜利。

inspiring adj. 鼓舞人心的，吸引人的。

We regard Lincoln as an inspiring leader.

The Yellow River Cantata is inspiring. 黄河大合唱是振奋人心的。

inspired adj. 受灵感启发的

The artist told me that was an inspired work of art. 这位艺术家告诉我那是件得自灵感的艺术品。

3. as it is 根据现在情况看，就以现在样子 （常用句子开头与结尾）

I thought things would get better, but as it is they are getting worse. 我原以为情况会好转，但照现在的样子看，只会更糟。

4. twice as difficult as it is 是….的两倍…(困难)

The room is twice bigger than mine.这个房间比我的房间大两倍。

The room is twice as big as mine. 这个房间是我的房间两倍。

The room is twice the size of mine. 这个房间是我的房间两倍。

Notes: A是B的几倍

倍数 +as+ 形容词/副词的原级 +as

倍数 + the +名词（size, length, width, height）+ of …

A比B大几倍

倍数+比较级+ than

5. admire vt.钦佩，羡慕 admire somebody for something因。。。而羡慕某人

I admire him for his success.我佩服他事业有成。

Listening

1. become of (命运等)降临，使遭遇= happen to

What will become of the children if their father dies? 若他们的父亲死了,这些孩子的遭遇将怎样?

I don’t know what has become of him. 我不知道他的遭遇如何。

2. used to do/ would do

过去经常发生的动作或存在的状态，暗示现在已不再如此。

would do 强调过去经常发生的动作，较为主观地表达说话者的感慨，富有感情色彩。

Used you to take a walk after the supper?你过去晚饭后常常去散步吗？

When at college, he would go swimming with his classmates. 上大学时，他常与同学一起游泳。

3. generous 慷慨大方的

He is generous with his money in helping others. 他用钱大方，慷慨助人。

It was generous of them to share their meals with their out-of-work neighbours.他们让失业的邻居与其共餐，甚为慷慨。

Speaking

1. What kind of people do you think they are?

可以用于插入语的动词还有 “suppose, guess, believe, imagine, expect.”

Who do you imagine will come to the party? 你想谁会来参加聚会。

What do you suppose happened to him? 你猜想他出了什么事。

2. think of 想起，想到，打算

think back to 回想

think highly/ well of 高度评价

think little/badly of 认为不好

think over 仔细考虑

think about 考虑

Reading

1. 不定式作定语的三种情况

1)不定式与被修饰的词之间具有逻辑上的动宾关系。

I have some letters to answer today. 今天我有几封信要回。

I want to get something to read during my holiday. 我想找点东西假期里看。

Please give me some paper to write on. 请给我几张纸用。

2)主谓关系(相当一个定语从句)

You must find a person to help you in the field.你必须找个人帮你干地里的活。

We need someone to send for a doctor. 我们需要个人去请医生。

I was the first woman to travel alone to the North Pole. 我是第一个独闯北极的女性。(=who traveled)

3)不具有动宾或主谓关系。

There is no need to worry about him. 没有必要为他担忧。

What’s the best season to go climbing? 什么是爬山的最佳季节?

I’m sure about his ability to complete the task alone. 我肯定他独立完成任务的能力。

2. grow/go+adj, 变成。。。。。。。

grow 逐渐变成，强调过程

The music grew faint as the band marched away. 音乐随着乐队走远而渐渐减弱。

After taking the medicine she grew fat. 吃了那药后，她变胖了。

go 变成（某种状态），通常表示不好的变化。

go red 变红 go mad 发疯 go hungry 挨饿

3 .just around the corner =likely to happen soon.

Victory was just around the corner. 胜利即将在眼前。

A big storm was just around the corner. 一场大风暴即将来临。

5. find oneself +形容词/介词短语/分词 发现自己来到某处/或处于某种境地

When day broke, we found ourselves in a small village at the foot of the mountain. 天亮时，我们发现自己来到了那山脚下的一个村子里。

When he came to life, he found himself in hospital. 他苏醒后，发现自己在医院里。

I found myself surrounded by a group of children. 我发现自己被一群孩子包围。

I found the success greater than I had expected. 我发现这一成就比我预期的更大。

6. 过去进行时/过去完成时/be about to do…+when….

过去进行时+when… 正在做。。。突然。。。

过去完成时+when… 还没（刚刚）。。。就。。。

be about to do…+when… 正要去做。。。突然。。。

I had finished my supper when suddenly someone asked me to eat out. 我刚吃过晚饭，这时有人邀请我出去用餐。

I was about to go out when the telephone rang. 我正要出去，电话就响了。

They were having a drink when a Frenchman came to them. 他们正在喝酒时，这时一个法国人来到他们身旁。

7. drop out 掉落，掉出

One of his teeth had dropped out.

他的一只牙齿掉了。

8. be thankful to sb. for sth./that….

I’m thankful to you for all your help. 我感谢你这一切的帮助。

You should be thankful that you have caught the train. 你赶上了火车应该感到高兴。

9. stand on 用…站立

stand on one’s head 用头倒立

stand on one leg like a cock 金鸡独立

10. 现在分词短语,表示条件， 相当于一个条件状语从句。

Going straight down the road, you will find the department store.

(= If you go straight down the road, you will find the department store.)

Working hard at your lessons， you will succeed. (=If you work hard at your lessons, you will succeed.)

11. die down/ die away/die out

die down (风/雨)逐渐平息，由强变弱。火（熄灭）

The wind has died down obviously 风已明显减弱。

The flames die down. 火焰熄灭了

die out 死光，不流行，消失

The kind of birds has died out in this area. 这种鸟已经在这一地区灭绝了。

The custom of wearing vests seems to be dying out. 穿马甲的习惯似乎在逐渐消失。

die away 指（风，声音等）渐渐消失

His footsteps died away in the darkness. 他的脚步黑暗中消失了。

12. somehow adv. 以某种方式，莫明其妙地；不知怎么地

We must stop her from seeing him, somehow. 我们得想个办法不能让她跟他来往。

Somehow I must leave for Paris. 我必须得设法前去巴黎。

Somehow I don’t feel I can trust him. 不知什么缘故，我觉得不很信任他。

13. value

vt. 重视 You should value your parents’ advice. 你应该重视你父母的劝告。

n. 价值，价格 His discovery is of great value. 他的发现很有价值。

14. 200-mile 数词+名词(单数)复合形容词

ten-ye

篇15：巢湖市第六中学高三英语教案(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

(Book3B. lesson 34)

by Wang Wen Xin

Place: Class Three Senior Three

Date: October 13th

Teaching Type: New lesson

Teaching aim 6 and clam ands:

1． Develop the students’ abilities of reading and comprehension.

2． Grasp the use of some useful words and expressions.

Important points:

1． Understand the contents of the pass age.

2． Analyse the structure of the text.

3． Some useful expressions:

Prepare sb for sth, At a height of, catch on, do sth to music

Difficult points:

1． Analyse the structure of the text.

2． The sentence pattern: It is/was + the emphasized part + that ….

Teaching methods:

Task-based method, comparative method.

Teaching Aids:

a projector, a tape recorder.

Teaching time:

One period.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1. Revision

Revise the dialogue in lesson 33 by asking some questions.

Step 2 preparation for reading

Ask the Ss some other pieces of equipment in gymnastics competition (Fee exercises, horse, rings double bars ……)

Step 3 Skimming Reading

1． Tick the types of exercises that man can perform in gymnastics.

Rings floor beam high bars horse double bars “horse” with two handles high – and – low bars

2． Read fast and match the number to tell what each paragraph is about

Para. 1 A dance

Para. 2 B different equipment

Para. 3 C history

Para. 4 D age

Para. 5-6 E safety

Para. 7 F boys and girls

3． Answer the questions

(1) What do gymnasts have to do in gymnastics competitions?

(2) Why do girls perform in gymnastics competitions earlier than boys.

Step 4 Intensive reading.

1． Ask the Ss to read the text again and answer the following questions.

(1) When and where did modern gymnastics begin?

(2) What did Berlin set up the gymnastics centre for in 1981?

(3) Why is dance an important part of gymnastics training?

2． Find out the correct choices.

(1) When do most gymnasts begin their training?

A. At the age of 14 or 15. B. At kindergarten.

C. After they’ve physically developed D. In primary school.

(2) Women do not perform on _____.

A. floor B. high – and – low bars C. beam D. horse with two handles.

(3) While training you _______. (Listen to the tope)

A. can sometimes work alone

B. must perform with out watches shoes and rings

C. have to reduce the training if you aren’t feeling well

D. should never wear clothes with collars or belts.

Step 5 Language points

I. Phrases

1. prepare sb for 使某人对……进行准备

e.g (1)The teachers are _________（指导学生准备考试）the examinations

(2)We should __________（为将来做好准备）

2. require

(1) require doing / to be done.

Your clothes require （washing /to be washed.）

(2) require sb to do sth

They required him - (keep) it a secret.

(3) require + that + classes … (should) do sth.

His health requires that he _______（go）to bed early

3. do sth to music 伴音乐做某事

e.g. The students are (doing eye exercises to music.)

伴着音乐做眼保健

4. at a height of … 在…高度

(1) The plane flew __________（八千公尺的高度）

(2) water was found __________（在十米深的地方）

5. catch on sth（被钩住）

My dress __________（被钉子钩住了）

II. Sentence patterns.

1. It is/was + the emphasized past + that (who clause ……)

e.g. He met an old friend in the park yesterday.

→ It was he that/who met an old friend in the park yesterday.

→ It was in the park that he met an old friend yesterday.

_______ he met an old friend yesterday?

A. Where it was that B. Was it where that

C. where was it that D. Was it that where

2. ……improves the way you hold your body.

3. Only women perform on the high – and – low bars, one of which is higher than the other, and the “beam”, which is a length of wood only four inches wide which is fixed at a height of 1.20 metres above the ground.

Step 6 Summary

1． Main idea of each paragraph.

Para. 1 history

Para. 2 dance

Para. 3 age

Para. 4 boys and girls

Para. 5-6 different equipment

Para. 7 safety

2． The different types of exercises that men and women do:

Men

(1) Floor

(2) Horse

(3) Rings

(4) High bar

(5) Horse with two handles

(6) Double bars Women

(1) floor

(2) Horse

(3) High – and – low bars

(4) Beam

Step 7 Home work

1． pay attention to “you” in “prepare you for”

It is used to mean people in general

Let the Ss find “you/yourself/your” from the passage.

2． preview lesson 35

Black board arrangement

It is / was … that …

It was he who / that

It was an old friend that / who

It was in the park that … Para. 1 history

Para. 2 dance

Para. 3 age

Para. 4 boys and girls

Para. 5-6 different equipment

Para. 7 safety

Teaching reflection:

篇16：主谓一致专项复习(新课标版高三英语下册教学论文)

主谓一致专项复习

【学习指南】

从广义上讲，一致关系牵涉到名词和代词之间、主语和谓语之间、主语和表语之间、主句谓语动词的时态和从句谓语动词时态之间等众多的一致关系，但本章只着重论述主语和谓语在人称和数的一致关系。

本章的学习重点是主谓一致的三个原则，即语法一致原则、意义一致原则和就近一致原则。然而，在语言实践过程中往往还会出现较为复杂的情况，如有些句子的主语不能从词的形式上看出是单数还是复数，有时还会出现一些习惯用法，这就要求我们在学习过程中要记住：规则一定要遵循，例外一定要注意，惯用法一定要重视。本章难点是集合名词作主语以及形复意单的名词作主语时的主谓一致，另外并列主语的主谓一致因其例外较多，也是我们在学习过程中值得关注的焦点之一。

一、语法一致的原则

语法一致是指主语为单数形式，谓语也用单数形式；主语为复数形式，谓语也用复数形式。

1、动词不定式或动词–ing形式作主语

动词不定式或动词–ing形式作主语时，谓语动词用单数。

To see is to believe.

眼见为实。

Asking costs nothing.

多问不吃亏。

2、从句作主语

名词性从句作主语时，谓语动词一般用单数形式。

That they will win is certain.

他们一定会赢是确信无疑的。

When they could finish the task is not known yet.

他们何时能完成任务还未知。

Whoever wants to join in the competition is asked to sign his / her name here.

要参加比赛的人请在这里签名。

【小贴士】

但what / whoever / which引导的主语从句充当主语时，有时要看what / whoever / which所指代的词的意义来决定谓语动词的数。

What he said is true.他所说的是真的。

What we need are more volunteers. 我们所需要的是更多的志愿者。

3、“more than one 或many a + 单数名词”作主语

“more than one / many a +单数名词”作主语时，尽管其意义复数，但谓语动词还是用单数形式。但“more than + 复数名词”或“more + 复数名词 + than one”作主语时，谓语动词要用复数。

More than one student has read Rowling’s Harry Porter.

许多学生看过罗琳的《哈利波特》。

Many a student has seen the film Titanic twice.

许多学生看了电影《铁达尼号》两次。

More than two hundred people have turned out at the meeting.

两百多人退出了会场。

More students than one are against the decision.

不止一个学生反对这个决定。

【小帖士】

“one or two +复数名词”作主语，谓语动词用复数，但“a / one + 单数名词+ or two”作主语，谓语动词单数、复数均可。

One or two days are enough for me to finish the work.

一两天的时间就足够我去完成这工作。

Only a / one word or two is / are needed here.

这里只需要一两个字。

4、用and连接的主语

由and连接的两个或两个以上的单数名词或不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。但如表示单一的概念时，谓语动词则用单数形式（见本章第二节“意义一致的原则”）。

Rice and wheat are grown in China.

中国种植小米和小麦。

Both his father and his mother are advanced workers.

他的爸爸和妈妈都是先进工作者。

5、用with, as well as等词连接的主语

“名词+ together with/as well as + 名词”结构作主语时，不能看作是并列主语，together with或as well as之后的名词是主语的附加成分，句子的谓语动词不受附加成分中名词单复数的影响，仍和第一个名词的数保持一致。

Our monitor as well as some of our classmates has been to the USA.

我们的班长和几位同学已去过美国了。

The bat together with the balls was stolen.

球拍和球都被偷走了。

【百宝箱】

英语中有很多属于“A + as well as + B”这种结构，谓语动词应与主语A 保持一致。

A together with B A和B A rather than B A而不是B

A along with B A与B A except/but B A除了B

A including B A包括B A like/unlike B A像/不像B那样

A in addition to B A加上B A no less than B A如B一样

6、关系代词作主语

定语从句中关系代词who, that, which等作主语时，其谓语动词的数与先行词的数一致。

AIDS is a disease that breaks down the body immune system and leaves a person defenseless against infections and illnesses.

艾滋病是一种破坏人体免疫系统，使人处于失去抗感染、抗疾病状态的病症。

Those who have finished the work can go home first.

那些已完成工作的人可以先回家。

I, who am your teacher, will do my best to help you.

我是你的老师，我会全力帮助你的。

【点津坊】

若先行词为“one of + 复数名词”时，从句中的谓语动词用复数；若先行词为“the only one of + 复数名词”时，从句中的谓语动词用单数。

He was one of the students who were given a prize. 他是那些获奖的学生之一。

I was the only one in my office who was invited. 我是办公室里唯一受到邀请的人。

7、由两部分构成的物体名词作主语

由两部分组成的表示衣物或工具的名词做主语时，谓语通常用复数，此类名词有：glasses（眼镜），spectacles(眼镜)，shoes（鞋子），boots（靴子），sneakers（轻便运动鞋）；trousers / pants（裤子），compasses（指南针），chopsticks（筷子），scissors（剪刀），socks（短袜）,stockings（长袜），clothes（衣服）等。但这类词如用a pair of修饰时，谓语动词用单数。

My glasses were broken while playing football yesterday.

昨天踢足球时我的眼镜被打烂了。

A pair of shoes is lying under the bed.

床底下有一双鞋。

Chopsticks were first introduced to Japan in the 3rd century A.D. and thus ended the practice of taking food directly by hand.

公元三世纪，筷子传到了日本，并从此结束了人们直接用手拿食物的做法。

【小帖士】

当a pair (of)表示“两个人”时，其谓语动词通常用复数；当表示“一对夫妇”时，谓语用单复数都行。

A pair of students are practising speaking English there. 两个学生正在那里练习讲英语。

The happy pair is/are going to Europe for their honeymoon. 这对快乐的新婚夫妇打算去欧洲度蜜月。

8、this kind / sort of +名词作主语

表示一个种类的“kind of + 名词”后面常用单数谓语动词，而“复数名词+ of this kind”后面的谓语动词常用复数。

This kind / sort of question is very difficult. 这种问题很难。

Questions of this kind / sort are very difficult. 这种问题很难。

9、amount和quantity结构作主语

“a large amount of + 不可数名词”结构作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；“large amounts of +不可数名词”结构作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式。类似的结构还有“a large quantity of +可数/不可数名词”结构（谓语用单数）以及“large quantities of +可数/不可数名词”结构（谓语用复数）。

A large amount of damage was done in a short time.

在短时间内就造成了巨大的损失。

Large amounts of money were spent on the bridge.

这座桥花了一大笔钱。

A large quantity of pure water is needed there.

那里需要大量的纯净水。

Large quantities of water are needed for cooling purposes.

需要大量的水来降温。

10、名词所有格作主语

指商店、工场、住宅等的名词所有格作主语时，后面往往省略了shop / home等名词，如the baker’s（面包店），the barber’s（理发店），the doctor’s（诊所），the Zhang’s（张先生家）等，谓语动词一般用单数。但表示店铺名称的名词所有格，如？？？？？等，谓语动词往往用复数。

My uncle’s is not far from here.

我叔叔家离这里不远。

The baker’s was destroyed in a big fire last year.

那家面包店在去年一场大火中被烧毁了。

McDonald’s have a lot of delicious food to sell.

麦当劳有许多好吃的食物出售。

【试题播报】

E-mail, as well as telephones, _______ an important part in daily communication.

A. is playing B. have played C. are playing D. play

【分析】该题目考查主语加附加成分时与谓语的一致原则。主语为单数时，后面附加成分的单复数不影响谓语动词的单复数。选项B、C、D都是复数形式，故答案为A。

二、意义一致的原则

句子的谓语动词和主语的数的一致是根据该主语的意义，而不是根据语法形式决定的。当主语形式为单数，但意义为复数时，谓语动词要用复数形式；但主语形式为复数，而意义却为单数时，谓语动词用单数形式。

1、无标记复数名词作主语

people（人们）, cattle（牛群），poultry（家禽）, police（警察），youth（青年）是无标记复数名词，即没有复数标记但用作复数的名词，其谓语动词总是用复数形式。

The police were sent to the spot to keep order immediately.

警察立即被派往现场维持秩序。

Cattle are one cause of the problem.

养牛是这个问题的一个原因。

2、单复数同形的名词作主语

英语中一些单复数同形的名词作主语时，应根据其表达的意义来决定谓语动词的单复数，常见的这类名词有sheep（绵羊），deer（鹿），fish（鱼），means（方法），works（工厂），species（种类），Chinese（中国人），Japanese（日本人）；Swiss（瑞士人）；crossroads（十字路口）；series（系列）等。

The chemical works was set up in 1980.

这家化工厂于1980年建的。

These glass works are far from the city center.

这些玻璃厂离市中心很远。

Every possible means has been used to prevent the air pollution, but the sky is still not clear.

为了防止污染，每一种方法都试过了，但天空仍然不清晰。

All possible means have been tried to keep animals and plants from becoming endangered.

为了使动植物的生命不受到威胁，所有的方法都试过了。

This species has been completely destroyed for different reasons.

由于不同的原因，这个物种已经被彻底破坏了。

Since so many species have been destroyed, we have to protect the ones that are still with us.

既然那么多的物种已被破坏，我们就得保护那些仍然与我们同在的物种。

3、集体名词作主语

团体性的集体名词表示整体时，其谓语动词用单数形式；但这些集体名词表示集体中若干个体时，谓语动词用复数形式。这类名词常见的有family（家庭），crowd（人群），class（班级），public（公众），enemy（敌人），audience（观众），government（政府），group（小组），committee（委员会），team（队），media（媒体），staff（全体职员），crew（全体人员）等。

The audience was deeply moved.

观众深受感动。（整体）

The audience were dressed in a variety of ways, some in suits and some in jeans.

观众衣着各不相同，有的穿套装，有的穿牛仔服。（个体）

A team which is full of enthusiasm is more likely to win.

情绪高昂的球队比较可能获胜。（整体）

The team are practicing hard on the playground.

队员们正在操场刻苦地训练。 （个体）

The media is not always reliable.

新闻媒体并不总是可信赖的。 （整体）

The media have made a bitter attack on the Health Minister.

各家媒体对卫生部长进行了严厉的攻击。 （个体）

【小帖士】

表示某一类东西的总称的集体名词，如clothing（衣服）, furniture（家具）, baggage/luggage（行李）, equipment（设备）等，没有复数形式，作主语时，其谓语动词用单数形式。

4、用and连接的表示单数概念的主语

有时，一些用and连接的主语表达的却是单数的概念，这时谓语动词也应用单数形式。

（1）用and连接的名词表示同一概念的结构作主语时

Bread and butter is nutritious for patients.

奶油面包对病人很有营养。（表示同一概念）

Both bread and butter are on sale here.

这里出售奶油和面包。（and连接两种食品）

A needle and thread was given to her, but she could not sew the button on.

针线给了她，但她不会把钮扣缝起来。（将针线作为一个整体）

Pen and ink is provided in the examination room.

考试室提供笔墨。（将笔墨视为一物）

【百宝箱】

常见的and连接的表示同一概念的短语：

bread and butter（奶油面包） a needle and thread（针线）

milk and water（掺水的牛奶） a knife and fork（一副刀叉）

fish and chips（炸鱼土豆片） a cup and saucer（一套杯盘）

meat and potatoes（肉炒土豆） a horse and cart（一匹马拉的车）

fruit and cream（加奶油的水果） a watch and chain（一只系表带的手表）

（2）“each/every/no + 单数名词+ and + each/every/no + 单数名词”作主语时

Every hour and every minute is precious.

每一小时，每一分钟，都很宝贵。

No man and no woman is not allowed to enter the hall.

每个人都不允许进入大厅。

（3）“A and B”结构指同一人或同一概念时

Our happiness and misery is due to our own actions.

幸福与否在于我们自己的作为。

Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.

早睡早起使人健康、富有和聪明。（指同一概念）

【巧辩栏】

有时冠词的使用可以帮助我们判断两个名词是同一还是并列。

The secretary and manager was speaking at the meeting.

那位书记兼经理在会上讲话。（只有一个冠词一般指同一个人）

The secretary and the manager spoke at the meeting.

书记和经理都在会上讲了话。（两个名词都有冠词是两个人）

5、“the + 形容词或过去分词”作主语

“the + 形容词或过去分词”表示一类人时，谓语动词用复数；如 “the + 形容词”指一个人或表示一种抽象概念或品质时，谓语动词用单数。

The wounded were saved by the villagers at last.

最后，伤员们被村民们救起。

The wounded in the accident was a policeman.

这次事故的受伤者是一名警察。

The beautiful is not always useful.

好看的并不总是有用的。

6、表学科的名词做主语

有些以s结尾表示学科名称的词，如physics（物理）, mathematics（数学）, economics（经济学）, politics（政治），mechanics(机械学，力学)等，作主语时谓语动词通常用单数形式。

Physics makes much use of mathematics.

物理学要大量运用数学。

Economics is her major.

她的主修课程是经济学。

7、表示时间、距离、金额、重量等复数形式作主语

表示距离、长度、价值、金额、重量等复数名词作主语时，如作为一个整体来看待的话，谓语动词通常用单数。

Four hours is enough time to spend repairing the machine.

四个小时足够用来修理那部机器。

Fifty dollars was a large sum for me at that time.

那时五十美金对我来说是一大笔钱。

Twenty kilometers is a quite long distance.

二十公里是一段相当长的距离。

8、分数或百分数作主语

分数、百分比作主语时谓语动词根据后面名词决定单复数。

More than 70 percent of the surface of the earth is covered with water.

地球百分之七十以上的表面被水覆盖着。

80 percent of the scientists invited to the conference are men.

被邀请参加大会的科学家百分之八十是男科学家。

One third of the work has been finished.

已完成了三分之一的工作。

One third of the students have not passed the end-of-term examination.

三分之一的学生没能通过期末考试。

9、国家、单位、书报名称作主语

国家、单位、书报名称作主语时谓语动词用单数。

The United States is leading the world in science and technology .

美国在世界科技方面领先。

General Motors sells about 15 percent of all cars and trucks in the world.

通用汽车公司汽车的销售总量占世界的百分之十五。

The New York Times is one of the most influential newspapers in the world.

《纽约时报》是世界上最具影响力的报纸之一。

10、名词性物主代词作主语

名词性物主代词作主语时，应根据上下文的意义决定谓语动词的单复数。

Your shoes are clean, while his (= his shoes) are dirty.

你的鞋是干净的，而他的却是脏的。

Ours (=our class) is a united class.

我们班是一个团结的班集体。

11、表示数量的词作主语

一些表示数量的词，如a lot of, half of, all of, none of 等，作主语时，谓语动词的数通常与of后面的名词保持一致。

A lot of workers are on a strike for better pay.

许多工人正在为得到更高报酬而罢工。

Lots of equipment is needed in the laboratory.

实验室需要许多设备。

None of the passengers were aware of the danger.

乘客中没有一个意识到危险的存在。

None of the money has been spent on repairs.

这笔钱没有花费在维修方面。

12、a number of与the number of作主语

“a number of ＋复数名词”作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式；“the number of＋复数名词”作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。

A number of new cars are being shown in the exhibition hall.

展厅里正在展出许多新车。

The number of the cars running on the streets is quite large.

马路上的车流量很大。

【试题播报】

The number of people invited ______ fifty, but a number of them ______ absent for different reasons.

A. were; was B. was; was C. was; were D. were; were

【分析】第一个句子的主语为the number，谓语动词应为单数；第二个句子的主语被由a number of修饰，谓语动词应为复数。故答案为C。

13、the rest of和the majority of结构作主语

the rest of和the majority of结构作主语时，谓语动词的数常与of后面的名词的数保持一致。

The rest of the books were returned to the library.

其余的书都归还给图书馆了。

The rest of the money was given to the villagers.

其余的钱都给了村民。

The majority of his classmates are from the countryside.

他同学大多数来自农村。

The majority of the damage is easy to repair.

这次的损害大部分容易补救。

14、such作主语

such作主语时根据其所指的内容决定谓语动词的单复数。

Such is our plan.

这就是我们的计划。

Such are his words.

这些就是他所说的话。

三、就近一致的原则

在一些结构或巨型中，谓语动词的人称和数须与邻近的主语保持一致。`

1、“there be”和“here be”结构

Here are my replies to your questions.

这些是我对你的问题的回答。

There is an apple, two bananas and some oranges on the plate.

盘子里有一个苹果，两条香蕉和一些橘子。

2、部分并列连词连接两个主语时

当either…or…；neither…nor…；not only…but also…；not…but…；or，nor等并列连词连接两个主语时，谓语动词的人称和数与邻近的主语保持一致。

Not only he but also his sisters have been to the Great Wall.

不仅他，还有他姐姐都去过长城。

Either he or you are to blame for it.

不是他就是你必须为此事负责。

Not you but I am responsible for the delay.

不是你而应是我对这次耽搁负责。

【试题播报】

Not only I but also Jane and Mary ________ tired of having one examination after another.

A. is B. are C. am D. be

【分析】本句考查not only…but also连接并列主语时的主谓一致。Not only…but also连接的并列主语应采用就近一致的原则，Jane and Mary充当主语用复数谓语动词，故选B。

3、倒装结构

当表示地点的介词词组位于句首时，一些表示“存在”之意的谓语动词，如be, lie, stand等，需和最靠近的主语保持一致。

Between the windows is a picture.

在两个窗户中间挂着一副画。

South of the lake stand two stone towers. 湖泊的南边有两座石塔。

【训练大本营】

一、选出正确选项：

1. Not only I but also Tom and Mary _________ fond of watching television.

A. am B. is C. are D. be

2. Twenty-five thousand dollars ________ the average income for a medium-sized family in the United States.

A. are B. is C. will be D. be

3. As a result of destroying the forests, a large _______ of desert _______ covered the land.

A. number … has B. quantity … has

C. number … have D. quantity … have

4. John is the only one of the staff members who ________ to be transferred.

A. is going B. are going C. have been going D. has been going

5. ---Each of the students, working hard at his or her lessons, _________ to go to university.

--- So do I.

A. hope B. hopes C. hoping D. hoped

6. Either you or the headmaster _________ the prizes to those gifted students at the meeting.

A. is handing out B. are to hand out C. are handing out D. is to hand out

7. The first two problems are very different, but the rest _________ easy.

A. is B. are C. was D. is being

8. Ten minutes ________ an hour when one is waiting for a phone call.

A. seemed B. to seem C. seem D. seems

9. The committee __________ among themselves for four hours.

A. has been arguing B. has been argued

C. have been arguing D. have been argued

10. All the employees except the manager ______ to work online at home.

A. encourages B. encourage C. is encouraged D. are encouraged

11. Every means ______ prevent the water from ________ .

A. are used to ; polluting B. get used to; polluting

C. is used to; polluted D. is used to; being polluted

12. The first use of atomic weapons was in 1945, and their power ______ increased enormously ever since.

A. is B. was C. has been D. had been

13. The number of deaths form heart disease will be reduced greatly if people _______ to eat more fruit and vegetables.

A. persuade B. will persuade C. be persuaded D. are persuaded

14. A library with five thousand books _______ to the nation as a gift.

A. is offered B. has offered C. are offered D. have offered

15. The first exercise should be done in class, the rest _______ at home.

A. is to be done B. are to do C. are to be done D. is to do

16. The news I referred to ___________ in today’s paper.

A. are B. be C. have D. is

17. Most of the work ________ by the time we got there.

A. was done B. have been done C. has been done D. had been done

18. All that I want to know ________ why your condition has not improved.

A. is B. was C. are D. were

19. The professor, _______ some of his assistants, _____ to attend our meeting this afternoon.

A. and; is B. as well as; is C. or; are D. except for; are

20. There ______ more than one answer to your question.

A. have been B. has been C. are D. is

21. which of the books do you think _______ best among the best-sellers?

A. sells B. is sold C. are written D. writes

22. Growing at the foot of the hill ______ wild flowers of different colors.

A. is B. are C. was D. have been

23. This kind of stories _______ instructive while stories of that kind _______ harmful to children.

A. is; seems B. are; seem C. is; seem D. are; seems

24. When and where to build a new factory _____ yet.

A. is not decided B. are not decided C. has not decided D. have not decided

25. ---Has everyone in your class passed the test?

---No, ________ only Tom and Philip who _______ passed it.

A. it was; had B. there is, have C. it is; have D. there were; had

二、改错

1. About one fifths of the workers in the chemical works is from the countryside.

A B C D

2. I wonder if the English-Chinese dictionary I referred to belong to him.

A B C D

3. All of the information in the newspaper are correct.

A B C D

4. It is said that our League secretary as well as some of our classmates are going to take

A B C D

the Band-4 examination.

5. Neither you, nor I, nor anyone else are willing to go out for a walk in the rain.

A B C D

6. Each of the passengers have his own room in the ship.

A B C D

7. Your trousers are dirty, you must have it washed at once.

A B C D

8. Every boy and every girl are asked to attend the lecture and make notes.

A B C D

参考答案：

一、选择正确答案

1. C 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. B 6. D 7. B 8. D 9. C 10. D

11. D 12. C 13. D 14. A 15. C 16. D 17. D 18. A 19. B 20. D

21. A 22. B 23. C 24. A 25 C

二、改错

1. D改为 are 2. D改为 belongs 3. D 改为 is 4. C 改为 is 5. C改为 is willing 6. C 改为 has 7. C改为 them 8. C改为 is

责任编辑：李芳芳

篇17：英语学科>>高三年级>>Angkor Wat (新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

抛砖引玉】

在本单元同学们将要学习有关古迹保护的知识，了解闻名于世的柬埔寨古高棉王朝庞大的宫殿遗址吴哥寺（又名吴哥窟）的历史和现状，树立爱护古迹的战略思想。也许你曾听到过它的美丽传说，见到过它旖旎风光的拍照，看到过它富有神秘色彩的特写镜头。真是“风景这边独好”。春天，万木茂盛，百花盛开；夏天，泉清林翠，风景幽奇；秋天，硕果累累，层林尽染；冬天，银装素裹，悬冰倒挂。课文中对吴哥寺的高度评价是：“As the sun sinks lower , shadows spread across the courtyard . After sunset , the sky turns pink . The grey stone towers take on a golden colour before turning pink . Nowhere else in the world can there be such a quiet , beautiful place .” ( 随着夕阳西下，院内阴影纵横。日落后，天空一片红霞。灰色的石塔抹上一层金黄色，然后变成粉红色。世界上再没有这样优美、恬静的地方了。) 今天，吴哥寺这座世界文物古迹，正以它独特的魅力吸引着世界各地越来越多的游客。

虽然我们人人都走出国门去领略吴哥寺的风光不现实，但是在本单元的阅读课中，作者用一种趣味盎然的笔调重现吴哥寺的文明和灿烂，让我们从一滴水而感知辽阔的大海，从一只贝壳而聆听渺远的风声。下面就让我们在课文中提到的神秘的古迹中作一次精神旅行吧！

【指点迷津】

A. 大纲规定的单元日常核心交际用语指南

Obligation (职责)

● Idiomatic Sentences 功能套语 30 句

1. We should finish the task ahead of time . 我们应该提前完成这项艰巨的任务。

2. I think we should paint the windows green . 我认为应该把窗户漆成绿色。

3. Is it necessary to give you a ring immediately ? 有必要立即给你回电话吗？

4. We must stop people ( from ) walking on this floor until it‘s firm . 在地板牢固以前，我们不能让人们在地板上走动。

4. I ought to do some studying . 我应该学的东西。

5. You must stay home looking after your mother . 你必须呆在家里照顾你生病的母亲。

6. - Must I be present at the meeting at 7 o’clock ? 我必须 7 点到会吗 ？

- No , you needn‘t . You may come at around eight . 不，不必要。你可以 8 点左右来。

7. I have to type this report tonight . 今晚我必须打出这份报告。

8. - Do I have to return the dictionary before Friday ? 周五前我必须归还词典吗 ？

- No , you don’t have to . 不，没必要。

9. In my opinion , you should do your homework more carefully in future . 依我之见，你以后要多注意你的作业。

10. You ought to write to your parents very often . 你应该经常给父母写信。

11. Is it necessary to show your passport at the entrance ? 在入口处得出示护照吗 ？

12. It‘s necessary that you should come to the office tomorrow morning . 明天上午你得到办公室去一下。

13. We must keep the balance of nature . 我们应该保持生态平衡。

14. Students should keep the classroom tidy and clean . 学生应该保持教室整洁。

15. It is necessary to fill in the form at the door . 进门时必须填表。

16. Am I expected to repeat the explanation ? 要不要我把解释再重复一遍？

17. Am I supposed to pay a visit to our sick neighbour ? 我是不是探望一下有病的邻居？

18. Are we required to make a plan tonight ? 是不是今晚我们必须制定一个计划？

19. Is there any need for us to get his permission ? 我们是不是需要得到他的许可？

20. I am afraid you will have to walk home on foot . 恐怕你不得不步行回家了。

21. I am afraid you can’t avoid do some washing by yourself . 恐怕你逃避不掉自己洗衣服了。

22. I think it necessary for you to obey the rules . 我看你有必要服从规章制度。

23. It is for you to decide whether to go or to stay . 是去是留由你决定。

24. There‘s no reason why you should pull down that fence . 没有理由一定要你拆掉那个篱笆。

25. It is up to you decide . 由你决定。

26. Please leave it alone . 请别理它 。

27. You had better not pick the flowers . 你最好别摘这些花。

28. I feel it is my duty to give you a hand . 我感到帮助你是我的职责。

29. No , I mustn’t be late for class once more . 不， 我决不能再迟到。

30. No , I shouldn‘t tell him a lie . I had better not object to his suggestion . 不，我不应该对他说谎。我最好不反对他的建议。

从以上 30 句可以看出，在提示对方的职责中常用情态动词 must , should , need , have to , had better , ought to , don’t have to 以及 be supposed to do , be necessary to do 等。

● Model Dialogues 交际示范

A

Monitor：Who is on duty today ?

Yu Fang：I am .

Monitor：Class will begin in a minute . You should clean the blackboard .

Yu Fang：Sorry , I nearly forgot it . I‘ll do it at once .

Monitor：You have to remember this next time .

Yu Fang：Yes , I will .

B

Receptionist：Can I help you ?

Guest：Are there any free beds ?

Receptionist：Sure . What kind of room do you like ?

Guest：A single room with a bath .

Receptionist：OK. But you have to fill in this form first .

Guest：Is it necessary ?

Receptionist：Yes , we should also see your ID (身份证) card .

C

Doctor：Well , Mrs Smith , I’ve completed my examination and I‘m happy to say it’s nothing serious .

Mrs Smith：Don‘t you think I should take an X - ray ?

Doctor：I don’t think an X-ray is necessary for this illness .

Mrs Smith：Will I need a blood transfusion ?

Doctor：No , Mrs Smith , you won‘t need it .

Mrs Smith：Shouldn’t I stay in bed for the rest of the week ?

Doctor：No , you should get outdoors more and get plenty of exercise .

Mrs Smith：Can I be cured ?

Doctor：You should listen to my advice and I‘m certain you’ll be fine .

Mr Smith：What should I do ?

Guest：You should put this medicine on your arms every four hours and by tomorrow it will be all gone . There‘s nothing to worry about .

● 高考试题缩影

1. - Shall I tell John about it ?

- No , you . I’ve told him already . ( NMET 94)

A. needn‘t B. wouldn’t C. mustn‘t D. shouldn’t

2. - We could have walked to the station ; it was so near .

- Yes . A taxi at all necessary . ( MET 92 )

A. wasn‘t B. hadn’t been C. wouldn‘t be D. won’t be

3. There was a lot of fun at yesterday‘s party . You come , but why didn’t you ? (99 上海)

A. must have B. should C. need have D. ought to have

答案：AAC

B. 单元重点新词透视

1. smooth 作形容词是“光滑的，平静的，平坦的”；作及物动词是“使光滑，消除困难、障碍”。

Our path in life will not always be smooth . 我们的生活道路不会总是一帆风顺的。

This is a smooth meeting . 这是一次顺利的会议。

The cloth feels smooth . 这布摸起来很光滑。

The sea is smooth . 海面风平浪静。

The gardener smoothed the soil in a flower bed . 园丁平整了花坛的泥土。

测试要点：

(1) smooth 的发音 [ smU:T ] ，比较极是 smoother ，最高级是 smoothest 。过去式是smoothed , 发音为[ smU:Td ] 。用在第三人称后的发音是 smooths [ smU:Tz ]。

(2) 该词的同义词是 calm ，反义词是 rough 。常用搭配是 smooth away “克服困难，消除障碍或者分歧”。如：Don‘t be afraid . We are able to smooth away these difficulties sooner or later . 不要担心，我们迟早会克服这些困难的。/ The guide smoothed away / over the quarrel between the two visitors . 向导平息了那两位游客间的争执。

2. spread ( spread , spread ) 延伸，展开，流传，传播，蔓延

In two years the city has quickly spread for ten miles to the north . 这两年里城市很快地向北延伸了 10 英里。

How terrible ! The forest fire spread quickly . 真可怕 ！火势很快地蔓延。

The story of these advanced workers spread quickly . 这些先进工人的事迹很快就传开了。

测试要点：

(1) 特别注意该词的过去式和过去分词形式。如：Word spread quickly about the accident .

(2) the spread of … “……的普及；……的传播；……的蔓延”。这里 spread 是名词。如：the spread of a disease 一种疾病的蔓延。the spread of education 教育的普及。

3. opposite 作形容词是“相反的，对面的，相对的”。作副词是“相反地，对面地”。作名词是“对面，相反，对立物”。注意该词的发音：[ ’Cp[zIt ]

It is strange that he should go in the opposite direction . 真奇怪，他朝相反的方向走了。

They sell things on the opposite side of the river . 他们在河的对面卖东西。

Right and left are opposites . 左和右是相对的。

Black and white are opposites . = Black is the opposite of white . 黑和白是对立物。

Hate is the opposite of love . 恨是爱的反义词。

测试要点：

(1) 辨析 opposite 与 contrary to

opposite 多指位置、方向、性质、结果的不同。表示处于讲话人对面时放于其后；表示一组相对事物中的一个时放在其前。如：the girl opposite对面的姑娘，live on the opposite side of the street 住街的对面，。contrary 表示与目的、行为、论据对立的含义，只用作表语。如：You deeds are contrary to the traffic rules . 你的行为是和交通规则背道而驰的。

(2) 该次还可以作介词。如：opposite the school 在学校的对面。/ The shop opposite the street belongs to me . 街对面的商店是我经营的。作介词时其后也可以加 to 。如：He smiles and sat down opposite to her . 他微笑着坐在她的对面。/ The direction opposite to north is south . 和北相反的方向是南。

C. 单元重点词组扫瞄

1. buy some more bricks 买更多的砖

some more + 可数名词或者不可数名词，意思是“更多的……；再……怎样”。如：

Will you have some more beancurd ? 你多吃点豆腐好吗 ？

This time I feel like borrowing some more magazines . 这次我想多借几本杂志。

2. make the surface smooth 让表面光滑

It is said that this cream will make your face smoother . 据说这种面霜会使脸部皮肤更光滑。

3. do some drawings 画些画

It is not right for a pupil to do some drawings on the wall . 小学生在墙上乱画不对的。

4. stop sb / sth (from) doing = prevent sb / sth (from )doing 阻止某人干……

注意：当 from 后是被动语态时，from 不要省。如：

No one can prevent / stop this plan from being carried out . 谁也不能阻止这个计划的落实。

We must stop these children (from) playing football in the street . 我们必须阻止孩子们在大街上踢足球。

5. put up a notice saying “Keep off”= put up a notice on which is written “Keep off”立一个上面写有“勿踩踏”的牌子

注意 keep off 在上下文中的不同意思有：避开，挡住，制止吃喝，不吃不喝……

Do be careful to keep off the dangerous dog . 务必躲开那条危险的狗。

After his illness the old man kept off noodles for a week .

The only way to get your weight down is to keep off fat . 减肥的唯一办法是不要吃肥肉。

Wet paint ! Keep off ! 油漆未干，请勿靠近！

6. do some studying 学点习

It is useful for you to do some studying in your spare time .

7. masses of 大量的，大批的（修饰可数或者不可数名词）

Can‘t you see I have masses of things to see to today ? 你没看到我今天有很多的事要处理吗？

I have masses of unanswered letters this week . 本周我有一大堆来信没有回。

The majority of us are worried about masses of homework on Sunday . 我们大部分都担心星期天的许多作业。

8. watch the news on television 看电视新闻

9. fix up an electric wire 安装电线

10. ring the building firm 给建筑公司打电话

11. as it is / was 事实上，既然如此，就目前这样子看，根据现在的情况看

As it is , we can hardly get to the station by 6 o’clock . 事实上，我们 6 点前是很难赶到车站的。

She agreed to buy the house as it is . 她同意照房子原样买下来。

I thought things would get better , but as it is they are getting worse and worse . 我原来以为情况会好转，但现在看来，情况是越来越恶化。

Don‘t do anything to make the situation worse ; it’s bad enough as it is . 不要再火上加油了，现在情况就够糟的了。

12. report on 对……进行报道

13. one‘s first visit to + 地点 “对……的第一次访问”。

He will never forget his first visit to China .

14. at war 处于战争状态，处于交战状态

At that time China was at war with Japan . 当时，中国正与日本交战。

注意这里介词 at 后没有冠词 the 。类似的表达还有：at desk 在工作，at table 在用餐，at work在上班，at sea 在海上，at + 名词

针对练习：

1) When he writes , he always keeps a dictionary （在手边）.

2) My family and I were ____ (吃饭) when somebody knocked at the door .

3) Don’t be nervous . Make yourself ____ (无拘无束) .

4) ____ (目前) I‘m very busy . Let’s discuss it sometime next week .

5) His manners are rough , but he is a kind man (在内心里) .

6) It‘s ten o’clock (晚上) .

7) He is （求学）in Paris , so I‘m afraid you can’t see him .

8) They had first met (在航海中) .

9) Wilma can play music (一见) .

10) (有时) I made mistakes when speaking English .

11) These nations were (在交战) but now they are (和好) .

12) You may come and go (随意地) .

13) Are your parents (在上班) ?

14) The baby weighed 8 pounds (在出生时) .

注意留心下列习语中的冠词有无，其意义不变：

at (the) worst 在最坏的情况下，at (the) least 至少，at (the) latest 最迟 ，at (the)most 最多

答案：1) at hand 2) at table 3) at home 4) At present 5) at heart 6) at night 7) at school 8) at sea 9) at sight 10) At times 11) at war , at peace 12) at will 13) at work 14) at birth

15. When he was in college , his college was at war . 当他上大学时，他的国家正处于战争状态。

16. fall to pieces 倒塌，解体，垮台，摔碎，身体垮下来

That ancient building was falling to pieces . 那座古建筑物正在倒塌。

After the death of Napoleon , his empire began to fall to pieces . 那破仑死后，他的帝国就开始瓦解了。

These glasses have fallen to pieces . 这些玻璃杯已经摔碎。

Your father will fall to pieces if he doesn‘t stop working so hard . 如果你父亲再这样拼命干下去，他的身体回垮的。（这里 fall to pieces = break down）

No wonder the car is falling to pieces . Have you seen how he drives it ? 难怪这辆车垮了。你看到他是怎样驾驶的 ？

The rainy season lasts for six months and water gets in among the stones . 雨季长达六个月，雨水渗入石缝中。

测试要点：注意对比由动词 fall 构成的短语：fall asleep 睡着。fall behind 落后。fall down 倒塌。fall flat on one’s face 直挺挺地面朝下跌倒。fall in 掉入。fall in love with sb 爱上某人。fall / get into the / a habit of 养成……的习惯。fall off 从……跌落。 fall on one‘s knees = go down on one’s knees 跪下。fall / get sick = fall / get ill 生病。

17. piles of = masses of = supplies of = quantities of = lots of 很多，大量，一堆一堆的。

The study was full of piles of old books . 那个书房里堆满了一堆堆的旧书。

Piles of rubbish can be seen in that works . 在那个工厂可以看到一堆又一堆的垃圾。

18. get in 进入，收割，渗入，抵达，插入，请来

Can we get in the house by the back door ? 我们可以经过后门进入房子吗？

What time does the train get in ? 火车什么时间进站 ？

The peasants are busy in getting in the crops . 农民们正忙于收割庄稼。

We must get somebody in to repair the television . 我们必须请人来修理电视机。

Little Jim is always getting in a word when others are talking . 小吉姆总是在别人谈话时插嘴。

测试要点：注意理解由 get 构成的短语间意义上的区别。get get a word in = get in a word 插嘴。get about/ around / round 各处走动。get abroad 消息、谣言等的传开。get along 过活，过日，进展。get away 逃脱。get back 回来，取回，恢复。get cold = catch a cold 感冒。get down 从……下来，写下。get down to 开始认真干…… 。 get home 到家。get in / into touch with 与……取得联系。get into 进入。get into a habit of 养成干……的习惯。get into trouble 引起麻烦。get off 从……下来。get on 上车、上马、上飞机等。get ready 准备好。get rid of 摆脱。get through 结束，完成。get together 聚会。get up 起床。

19. go down to 下到，延续到，减少到

The native women go down to the river to wash clothes . 当地妇女到河里去洗衣服。

During her illness her weight went down from 50 kilos to 40 kilos . 她生病时体重由 50 公斤减少到 40 公斤。

注意 go down into 在本课是“根深深扎入”的意思。如：The roots go down into the holes between the stones .

20. devote + time / energy / oneself + to + -ing 把时间（精力）用于…… 。

He devoted 10 years to doing the research . = He spent 10 years doing the research .

Captain Cook devoted several years to charting the coasts of east America .

Lei Feng devoted all his life to serving the people .

21. lay down 安放，铺设，放下武器等。

She laid the sleeping child down on her bed .

They refused to lay down their arms . 他们拒绝放下武器。

Many new railways have been laid down in the past few years . 过去的几年里铺设了许多铁路。

22. Lay these boards along , not across . 把这些木板直着放，不要横着放。

23. in a corner 在角落里

Piles of stones lie in a corner of the courtyard .

We found her crying in the corner of the classroom .

注意：in the corner 是侧重在 180 度以下的角。在讲到 180 度以上的角时介词可用 at / on / round / around + the corner 。

There is a bookstore on / at the corner . 在街道拐角处有个书店。

He is standing at a street corner .

24. watch over 看守，照看，监视，守卫

The work of cleaning the stones is watched over by three Indian chemists . 石头的清洗工作是由三名印度化学家监督的。

The mother bird is watching over her young . 雌鸟守护着她的幼雏。

The prisoners were watched over by policemen .

25. fill in 填满，填写

In order get a passport , you must fill in the official form . 要申请护照，你得先填写正式表格。

26. at midday = at noon 在中午

27. protect against / from 保护不受……的侵袭或者伤害

We wear dark glasses to protect our eyes against the sun .

You must protect those boys against danger .

An umbrella will protect you against the rain .

28. in battle 在战争中，在战斗中

Millions of people were killed in battle .

29. in search of 寻找

注意区别：in one‘s search for

30. carry on 继续下去，继续进行

Please carry on as usual while I am away . 我不在时，请照常干。

Conversation was carried on in English .

Now let’s carry on with the work .

31. after sunset 日落后。

32. take on 呈现出新的面貌

After the thorough cleaning , our school took on a new look . 大扫除之后，我校呈现出了新的面貌。

Since 1978 , China has taken on a new look .

Under the vivid pen of the writer , these dry facts of history have taken on flesh and blood . 在这位作家生花妙笔之下，这些枯燥乏味的历史事实被写得有血有肉的。

The new leaders are making every effort to improve business management , and the factory is beginning to take on a new look . 新领导努力改善经营管理，工厂开始呈现新的面貌。

After the students put up a Christmas tree in the centre , the classroom took on a holiday appearance . 同学们在教室中央放了一株圣诞树，教室里呈现出一派节日景象。

33. fall into ruins 坍塌成废墟

Many of the stone figures had been stolen and others were falling into pieces . 许多石像被盗窃，另外一些石像崩裂倒塌。

34. be astonished by 被……弄得大为吃惊

be astonished to do 干……很吃惊

be astonished that 对……大为吃惊

35. cover an area of = take up an area of = occupy an area of = have an area of 占地面积……

This school covers an area of 500 square miles .

China has an area of about 9,600,000 square kilometres .

36. over a period of + 时间“历经……时间”

37. up until / to 直到，到……为止

The French , after discovering the ruined temple , did a lot of repair work up until 1970. 在发现这座满目疮痍的寺庙后，法国人做了大量的修复工作，直到1970年为止。

They had been built over a period of six centuries up till 1431 . 它们是1431年以前经过六个世纪才建成的。

38. do a lot of repair work 做大量的维修

39. in a poor state 处于破烂不堪的状态。

注意该词组的不同搭配：in a solid state 以固体状态。in a bad state of health 身体状态不佳。in a good state 状态良好。

40. have experience in 在……有经验

He has a lot of experience in repairing TV sets . 他有大量的修理电视机的经验。

She has much experience in teaching English .

注意：experience 作经验是不可数名词，作经历是可数名词。

We had several terrible experiences on our trip . 我们在旅途中遇到了几件可怕的事。

41. hand tools out to workers 把工具分发给工人

42. carry out repairs to + 名词 “对……实施维修”

43. once in a while 偶尔，有时

I don‘t drink wine as a rule , but I don’t mind a glass once in a while . 我一般是不饮酒的，但是我也不反对偶尔喝一杯。

44. have a shower 洗淋浴

45. depend on / upon sb to do 依靠某人干……

46. have a midday break 中午休息一下

47. give a tip to sb = give sb a tip 给某人小费

You had better give tips to waiters .

48. go/ make / take + on a tour of + 地点 “对……进行参观；到……旅游”

We are going to make a tour of New Zealand next summer .

49. spread across 传遍

The disease spread quickly across the village .

50. obey the rules for sb 服从对……的规定

D. 单元语法学习目标

复习动词的时态：一般现在时、现在进行时、现在完成时、一般过去时。

● 一般现在时（The Present Indefinite Tense）的测试 5 要点：

1、表示不受时间限制的客观存在、科学真理、格言等。

Water boils at 100 ℃ .

Twice two is four .

The earth goes around the sun .

Pride goes before a fall . 骄者必败。

One today is worth two tomorrows . 一个今天胜过两个明天。

Practice makes perfect . 熟能生巧。

Japan lies to the east of China .

Shanghai stands on the Huangpu River .

England and France are separated by the English Channel .

2、一般现在时表示经常地或者习惯的动作，常与频度状语 usually , often , sometimes , every morning , always , regularly 以及 at present , these days , nowadays , at the moment 等时间状语连用。

Mum doesn‘t drive as well as Dad . She stops too suddenly and turns quickly .

Peter used to work in Geneva , but at present he works in London .

The Hunts usually live in Scotland , but at the moment they live in the south .

Being middle school students , you do homework every day .

3、在口语中，一般现在时往往可和一个表示未来时间的状语连用，表达一个按规定、计划、安排要发生的动作。这种动词是：go , come , fall , arrive , start , begin , meet , stay , take , place , happen 等。

When do you start , Mr Green ?

This train leaves at 10:00 .

Miss Black comes next week .

- When do they leave for the countryside ?

- They start next Saturday .

A：Is there any meeting today ?

B：Yes . It begins at 2:30 in the afternoon .

4、在时间和条件状语从句中可用一般现在时代替一般将来时。

Please let me know when he comes back .

I will go to see him if it is fine tomorrow .

If he doesn’t like it , nor / neither will I.

5、在某些以 here , there 开头的句子中用一般现在时表示正发生的动作。

Here comes the bus ! 汽车来了！

There goes the bell ! 铃响了！

● 现在进行时（The Present Continuous Tense）的 7 个测试要点

1、现在进行时表示说话时正发生的或者正进行的动作。常与时间状语 now , at the moment 等连用。

It is raining hard now . Don‘t hurry .

I am writing a letter . Will you please turn down the radio ?

Watch out (当心) ! It’s falling .

Look ! The clouds are gathering .

Look at this picture of a busy railway station . A train is standing at one of the platforms ready to leave . Some of thepassengers are looking out of the windows watching the late-comers who are hurrying along looking for empty seats .

We are busy at the moment . I‘m selling cigarettes . My father is selling some sweets .

2、表示现阶段正在进行而此刻不一定在进行的动作。可和时间状语 now , these days 等连用。

She is studying law while her brother is studying medicine .

Is my daughter working hard in the factory , Manager Wang ?

How are you getting along / on with your studies ?

I usually get up at eight , but I’m getting up at six every day this week .

3、表示按计划、安排将要发生的动作。

We are going to Rome next week .

Mr Black is leaving for Shanghai in a few days .

Are you doing anything special tonight ?

4、用在时间和条件状语从句中表达将来正进行的动作。

I‘ll telephone you this afternoon while I’m waiting .

I‘ll think about it while you are writing the report .

When you are talking with him , take care not to mention this .

If you are standing at the corner when I pass , I’ll give you a lift into town .

5、现在进行时和动词 hope , wonder 连用表示婉转的口气。

I am hoping you‘ll give me some advice .

I’m wondering if I may have a word with you .

We are wondering if you have any suggestion .

6、现在进行时与 always , continually , constantly 等副词连用表示反复或者习惯性的动作，含有说话人的某种感情色彩，如赞扬、遗憾、讨厌、不满等。

He is always asking such easy questions .

He is constantly leaving his books about .

7、少数动词，如jump , hit , kick , knock , drop 等瞬间动词用进行时比动作的重复或者即将发生。

He is knocking at the door .

The girls are jumping .

● 一般现在时和现在进行时的 6 个区别点

区别点一：一般现在时表示经常性的动作，而现在进行时表达现在或者现阶段正发生的动作。

He studies hard .

He is studying hard this term .

My watch works perfectly . (经常性)

My watch is working perfectly . (短暂性)

He lives in Beijing .

He is living in Beijing .

区别点二：用现在进行时往往带有感情色彩，而用一般现在时只是说明事实。

John does fine work at school . （说明事实）

John is doing fine at school . （表扬）

Now I live in a very pleasant flat . （事实）

Now I am living in a very pleasant flat . （满意）

现在进行时表达感情色彩时常和always , forever , constantly 等连用。

He is always thinking of how he could do more for the poor .

She is always changing her clothes .

区别点三：一般现在时表示现在发生的动作，现在进行时表示眼前看得见的动作。

Boats pass under the bridge .

The boat is passing under the bridge .

区别点四：一般现在时用来表示永久的情况或者完成的动作，现在进行时表示的暂时或临时性动作。

My parents lives in Canada .

I‘m staying with one of my classmates .

区别点五：表示知觉、感觉、看法、感情、愿望的动词常不用现在进行时而用一般现在时。如：see , hear , smell , notice , taste , know , think , like , want , wish , have , fit , belong to 。

The necklace belongs to Jenny .

I hear you want to do business abroad .

区别点六：表示问候性的亲切感多用现在进行时。

How are you feeling today , Xiao Ming ? I hope you will be well soon .

How are they getting along with their work ?

● 现在完成时（The Present Perfect Tense）的 6 个测试要点

1、不带时间状语的现在完成时表示说话之前动作已经完成，而后果和影响至今存在。

He has gone to Europe . You can’t see him .

Has he had his supper ?

He has gone to Beijing . 他去北京了。

He has been to Beijing .他去过北京。

2、带状语的现在完成时表示动作开始于过去并持续到现在，也许还要持续下去的动作或者状态。

She has been ill for two weeks .

I haven‘t seenhim for many months .

She has learnt a lot since she cameto No. 16 Middle School .

3、在用 already , yet , before , just , ever , lately , recently 这类副词或者频度副词 often , sometimes , rarely , never , once , twice , three times 做状语时常用现在完成时。

Have you ever listened to foreign music ?

This is the second game . They’ve already won a game .

He as well as I has seen the film before .

We went to have a haircut once a month .

4、特别注意由 since , for 引起的时间状语与现在完成时的连用。since 后必须是确定的时间点，而不能是一段时间。

I‘ve known him since we were children .

They haven’t visited us since .

由 for 引起的时间状语中，介词 for 常被省去。

I‘ve studied English (for)a long time .

For months he hasn’t gone to the movies .

5、含下列状语的句子常与现在完成时连用：ever since , in the past two weeks , in the last few years , until now , till now , up to now , up to the present , so far , for the last few months , over the last few weeks . during the last few centuries 。

Up to now , everything has been successful .

In the last 50 years China has made great advances in socialist revolution and socialist construction .

6、注意现在完成时不能与非延续性动词连用。如：marry , die , leave , start , join , end 等。但可以借助这些动词的形容词或状态词与现在完成时连用。

He has been married to Joan for a year . = He married Joan a year ago .

She has been a Party member for two weeks . = She joined the Party two weeks ago .= It is two weeks since she became a Party member .

● 一般过去时（The Past Indefinite Tense）的 4 个测试要点

1、一般过去时表示过去某一时刻或者某一段时间发生的动作或者状态。

Last night we went to enjoy a good performance .

I usually sleep indoors , but I slept outdoors last summer .

- How long have you been here ?

- Only about five minutes . Jane and Simon walked here with me .

I can‘t find the dictionary . Someone put it on the top of the bookshelf .

2、表示过去的习惯动作。通常同时间或者频度状语连用。

He smoked a lot five years ago .

We went to school together when we were boys and so we saw each other every day .

The doctor came once a week and examined all who were ill .

3、used to do 和 would 常表达过去常干……。used to 含有强烈的今昔对比，可以和状态动词连用。而would 不能与状态词连用，句中常用时间状语的暗示。

Tom used to eat out every day , but now he can’t afford it .

When he was old , he would rise early and take a walk before breakfast .

We used to be good friends . (不能用 would)

There used to stand a tower at the foot of the hill . (不用 would)

4、在句型 “It is time that …；It is about time that … ；It is high time that … ”后的从句中用一般过去时。在 would rather , would sooner , had rather , had sooner 后的从句中用一般过去时。

It is high time that we went to school .

I had rather you came next week .

二、学海导航

【学法指要】

Unit 7 句型与难点释疑

Lesson 25

1. I don‘t think these will be enough . 我认为这些还不够。

〖释疑〗注意陈述句以第一人称主语 I / we + don’t think (expect , believe , guess , imagine , suppose) + that 从句时，反意疑问句与从句相一致 ， 用肯定式，因否定已前移。否则，主句是由其他人称作主语时，仍与主句相一致。例如：

I don‘t think these will be enough , won’t they ?

We don‘t believe that she has her breakfast , does she ?

对比：we don’t believe that she has had her breakfast , has she ?

He doesn‘t suppose you are a great success , does he ?

2. What can we do to make it look less ugly ? 我们能想个什么办法使它不那么难看呢 ？

〖释疑〗注意使用 make sb do , make oneself done , be made to do , make sth to do

They made us work all day and all night against the flood water . = We were made to work all … .

She raised her voice to make herself heard by all of the them .

He made a box to put his shoes in .

3. As long as that ? 要那么长的时间吗 ？= Will it take as long as that ?

〖释疑〗as long as 长达……之久。

It took as long as eight years to repair the old temple .

It took them as long as three years to find out the cause of the plane crash .

It took this tennis player as long as four hours to win the championship .

另外注意 as long as = so long as = if “只要”引起条件状语从句，句中用现在时代替将来时。

You can smoke as long as you are not afraid of breaking the rules .

Lesson 26

1. Piles of stones lie in a corner of the courtyard , waiting to be replaced . 院子的角落里放着一堆一堆的石头，准备作更换之用。

〖释疑〗句中的 waiting to be replaced 是现在分词短语作伴随状语。这时可以变为并列谓语动词的句子或者非限制性定语从句。如上面的分词短语可换为：

Piles of stones are in a corner of the courtyard , and are waiting to be replaced .

Piles of stones are in a corner of the courtyard , which were waiting to be replaced .

Many people stood along the river bank watching the boat race . = Many people stood along the river bank and watched the boat race .

2. As the sun sinks lower , shadows spread across the courtyard . 随着夕阳西下，院内的阴影扩展开来。

〖释疑〗as 作连词引导的时间状语从句含有“当……的时候；一边……一边”。 when常含有“突然……”。while 常含有“对比”。

As one grows older , one becomes more experienced .

We were walking along the street when we heard “Help ! Help !”.

He was doing some reading while I was doing some washing .

3. To make things worse , many of the men have gone off to cities in search of higher pay , leaving women from nearby villages to carry on with the work . 更糟糕的是，很多男子去城里谋求较高工资的工作，因此，只有让附近村庄里的妇女来从事这一修复工作。

〖释疑〗to make things worse “使情况更糟糕的是”。

leaving women … 是现在分词短语作结果状语。

注意 leave 的复合结构有：

1）leave + 名词 / 代词 + to do 让某人去干……。

Oh , you can leave me to deal with the matter .

2）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 形容词作宾补

His illness has left him very weak .

3）leave + 名词/代词 + 过去分词作宾补

How careless you are to leave your room unlocked .

4）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 现在分词做宾补

His words left us talking all the day .

5）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 介词短语作宾补

This left her without a ray of hope .

6）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 从句

Leave it where it is .

Leave everything as it is .

Leave the animals as they are .

4. Nowhere else in the world can there be such a quiet , beautiful place . 世界上再没有这样优美、恬静的的放了。

〖释疑〗此句是倒装句。正常语序是：There is nowhere else in the world as quiet and beautiful as this place . 如果 nowhere 不放在句首，句子就不倒装。

当含有否定意义的副词或者连词放在句首时句子用倒装。这类词有：hardly , never , not , neither , not only … but also , little , nowhere , not a single , scarcely , barely , at no time , not once , in no time 立即,in no way 决不，by no means 决不， 等。

Never in my life have I seen such a stone .

Not a single mistake did he make this time .

Nowhere has the world ever seen such a bird as here .

By no means should we do like that .

Not only was everything he had taken away from him , but also his German citizen .

Nowhere is there a place for him to settle down .

Nowhere can you enjoy such beautiful music .

Ltttle did he know what trouble he was going to have .

Not until quite recently did I hear from her .

Very little did they sleep last night .

对比：Her watch is nowhere to be found . = Nowhere is her watch to be found .

注意对比由 not only … but also 连接两个并列成分作主语时，句子不倒装。

Not only girls but also boys wear such red skirts as that .

Lesson 27

1. Thousands of stone blocks were moved and new roof sections were replaced where necessary . 移动了成千上万的石块，必要的地方还换上了新的屋顶。

〖释疑〗where necessary = where it is necessary to replace them .

本句是省略句。常见的省略有：

一、主语中的省略

1. 主句中的省略多见于句首，且多用于非正式文体。如：

(It is) Too bad you can’t go camping with us next week .

(Is there) Anything more you want to say ?

2. 回答时，主句有时全省去。如：

- When shall we start ? - (You may start) Whenever you like .

- Why is he angry with her ? - (He‘s angry with her) Because she lost his keys to the office .

二、从句中的省略。

1. 宾语从句。

以 which , when , where , how , why 等引出的宾语从句中谓语与主句相同时，可省略谓语乃至主语而只保留引导词。如：

Please hand me any one of these books ; I don’t care which (you hand me) .

He‘ll return to his hometown , but we don’t know when (he‘ll return ) .

She can’t attend this meeting , but we wonder why (she can‘t attend) .

2. 在 I’m afraid , I believe , I hope , I imagine , I should say , I suppose , I think 等之后的“not”与 “so”分别等于否定与肯定的宾语从句。如：

Will it snow tonight ? - I hope not . (= I hope that it won‘t snow tonight . )

Is he disappointed ? - I’m afraid so . (= I am afraid that he is disappointed . )

3. 定语从句可以省略作宾语的关系代词；在非正式文体往往省略关系副词 when 和where ; 关系代词 as 引导的定语从句中，主谓结构也往往被省略。如：

I‘ll never forget the days (which) we spent together in the village .

I’ll never forget the day (when) we first met .

He gave the same reason as (he had given) before .

4 . 状语从句。

(1) 在时间、让步、方式、条件状语从句中，如果从句主语是 it 或与主句主语一致时，则从句中的主语和 be 动词通常省略。如：

My sister started to learn dance when (she was) a child .

Although (he was) the youngest in his class , he won the first prize .

His suggestion , whether (it is) right or wrong , would be considered .

I‘ll attend this lecture , if (it is) possible .

(2) 由 than , as 引导的比较状语从句中，在不影响句子要表达的完整意义的条件下，从句中的成分可省略。如：I know you better than (I know) him .

【妙文赏析】

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从 1- 20 各题所给的四个选项中选出最佳答案。

James sat outside the office waiting for the interview . He felt so (1) that he didn’t know what to do with (2) . The person who had gone in (3) him had been in there for nearly an hour . And she looked so confident(自信的) when she went in . (4) James . He felt (5) that she had already got the (6) . The problem was that he wanted this job (7) . It meant (8) to him . He had (9) it such a lot before the day of the interview . He had imagined himself (10) briliantly at the interview and (11) the job immediately . But now here he was feeling (12) . He couldn‘t (13) all those things he had (14) to say . At that moment , he almost decided to get up and (15) . But no - he had to do this . He had spent so much time considering it that he couldn’t (16) like that . His hands were hot and sticky and his mouth felt dry . At last the door of the office opened . The woman who had gone in an hour earlier came out looking very (17) with herself . She smiled sympathetically(同情地) at James . At that moment James (18) her . The managing director then appeared at the office door . ‘Would you like to come in now , Mr Davis ? I‘m sorry to have kept you waiting . ’James suddenly (19) that he had gone home after all . He got up ,legs (20) and forehead sweating and wondered whether he looked as terrified as he felt .

1 . A . healthy B . nervous C . careless D . confident

2 . A . the managing director B . the woman C . himself D . the situation

3 . A . by B . with C . before D . after

4 . A . Not like B . So did C . Do as D . Do like

5 . A . doubtful B . sure C . angry D . astonishing

6 . A . reward B . first C . prize D . job

7 . A . hopelessly B . naturally C . easily D . so much

8 . A . everything B . happiness C . difficulty D . nothing

9 . A . dreamed of B . learned of C . thought about D . talked about

10 . A . explaining B . performing C . answering D . writing

11 . A . offered B . asked for C . being offered D . being asked for

12 . A . crazy B . excited C . probable D . terrible

13 . A . depend on B . afford C . believe in D . remember

14 . A . kept B . been taught C . planned D . been supplied

15 . A . leave B . go in C . prepare D . practise

16 . A . take back B . put off C . give up D . put down

17 . A . ugly B . pleased C . sad D . pretty

18 . A . noticed B . loved C . missed D . hated

19 . A . thought B . hoped C . wished D . regretted

20 . A . shaking B . bending C . walking D . stopping

〖赏析〗从上下文透射出文章中的两个形成鲜明对比的人物，一个是洋洋得意的女求职者，她傲慢的形象令人作呕。另一个是令人同情的 Mr Davis ，他很需要这份工作，但自己信心不足，位能表现出比胜的信心。1、选B。从下文那位女子在里面已有近一个小时可想 Mr David 在门外焦急等待的心情。2、选C。越是焦急，越是控制不住自己的形象。do with himself 在这里可理解为 “控制自己”。3、选C。从下文等待知已有人在他前面应试。4、选A。从该女子lookes so confident “显得如此自信”可以说她不像Mr Davis 那样。5、选B。feel sure that “感到一定能”为固定词组。6、选D。来这里是为了谋到一份工作。7、选D。从下文He had thought about it such a lot before the day of the interview 可以推出他十分需要这分工作。8、选A。既然对这次应聘左思右想，自然意义重大。9、选C。从下文的该说什么，该怎么表现出非凡的形象可推知应提前反复考虑。10、选B。要想应聘成功，必须给人以称职的印象，这就需要应试这表现出非凡的言谈举止和素养。故用perform有表现之意。11、选C。应试成功就被别人给一份工作，imagine 要求后跟动名词，故应被给一份工作，这里用了动名词的被动式。12、选D。从那位女子的情况导致他失去应试的决定。这自然是让人不寒而栗的。13、选D。在关键时候人一紧张会产生手忙脚乱，丢三忘四的情况。14、选C。原计划的所作所为成为泡影，plan to 计划干……。15、选A。从get up 可看出他准备放弃应试，一走了之。16、选C。可又一想，自己为此不知花了多少时间，这样轻而易举的放弃不是太可惜吗？成功与否，不试哪能知晓？17、选B。那女子自以为胜券在握，但下文让Mr Davis 进去说明鹿死谁手，难以定论。18、选D。看着那样一个女子是自己的对手，他当然是怀恨在心。19、选C。他的心情真是十分混乱，狠不得自己早已溜走。20、选A。紧张时人口干、腿软、额头冒汗，这是常识。

【思维体操】

人体名词的别致魅力

在英语里，表示人体各部分的名词，如眼、耳、口、鼻、心、手、脚等常用在习惯用语中，生动形象，栩栩如生，具有强烈的修辞效果。请同学们仔细阅读下文，体会人体名词的具体意义。

一、人体名词赋有抽象意义，具有转喻性。

It was surprising that there were so many hungry mouths .

令人不可思议的是，竟有如此多的难民。

Premier Zhu completed the first leg of a five－nation tour .

朱总理完成了访问五国旅途中的第一段行程。

Her niece has a sharp tongue . 她侄女说话尖刻。

Will you keep an eye on my suitcase ?

请照看一下我的手提箱好吗 ?

She has an ear for music. 她有欣赏音乐的能力。

Journalists usually have a nose for news .

记者常善于打听消息。

He has a head for figures . 他善于计算。

They live in the heart of the city . 他们住在市中心。

Little Tom has a tooth for candy. 小汤姆爱吃糖。

He is four feet six inches . 他身高四尺六寸。

二、人体名词具有拟人的修辞效果。

The wheat is heading up nicely . 小麦长势良好。

His name heads the list . 他是名单上的第一名。

The docks fingers out into the water. 码头伸向水面。

She always eyes him narrowly . 她总是端详着他的一举一动。

A soldier handed her out of a car . 一位战士扶她下了车。

Arm our minds with DengXiaoping’s Theory .

用邓小平的理论武装我们的头脑。

三、在一些谚语或警句中，人体名词具有对应修辞格的特点。

A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush .

双鸟在林不如一鸟在手。(多得不如现得。)

Two heads are better than one. 两人智慧胜一人。

Many hands make light work. 人多事易做。

Out of sight，out of mind. 离久则情疏。（眼不见心不烦。）

四、人体名词代替人，有提喻作用。如：

We‘re short of hands at present. 目前我们缺乏劳动力。

The plane was lost with 100 souls. 那架飞机失事，有100人丧生。

Grey hairs are respected in China. 在中国，老年人受到尊敬。

Do pay attention to those hungry mouths.

务必关注那些饥饿的人们。

Dear heart，look at your face! 宝贝，看看你自己的脸吧!

五、人体名词表委婉修辞

The old man closed his eyes. 那位老人已去逝了。

She is off her head for ages. 她已精神失常好久了。

The man in black is a light－fingered gentleman.

穿黑衣服的是个小偷。

She is still with one foot in the grave. 她已危在旦夕。

The news made us open our eyes. 那消息使我们瞠目吃惊。

He is on his last legs. 他已奄奄一息。

六、人体部位词可以作句子的状语

In those days they fought shoulder to shoulder bravely.

那时他们英勇无畏地并肩战斗。

Strangely，they were standing face to face.

奇怪的是，他们当时面对面站着。

Both of them lay there back to back. 他们俩背对背而卧。

七、人体部位词后加－ed可构成复合形容词，形象而逼真。

a warm－hearted man 热心肠的人

a fair－haired girl 一个长着金色头发的姑娘

a round－faced boy 一个圆脸男孩

a blue－eyed woman 一个蓝眼睛的妇女

a three－legged table 一张三条腿的饭桌

a one－eyed general 一个独眼将军

三、智能显示

【心中有数】

一、高中英语第三册 Units 1-6 词语辨析

Unit 1

1 . believe / believe in

believe 意为“相信，认为”，其后跟名词，也可跟从句或带不定式的复合宾语 ( 动词多为 be，它还可以用在否定的“简略答语”中，not 位于动词之后 ) 。例如：

I just could not believe my eyes . 我简直不能相信我的眼睛。

I believe that he was dead . 我认为他那时已经死了。

He believed the earth to be a globe . 他相信大地是一个球体。

- Will they be ready tomorrow ? 他们明天能准备好吗 ?

- I believe not . 我看不行。

believe in 意为“信奉，信仰”，后面常接表示真理或宗教一类的名词，也作“信任，信赖”解。例如：

My grandpa believes in Buddhism . 我爷爷信奉佛教。

We don’t believe in ghosts . 我们不信鬼神。

We must work , and above all we must believe in ourselves . 我们必须注意：believe in sb 与 believe sb 有不同的含义。试比较：

I believe him . ( = I believe what he says . )我相信他的话。

I believe in him . ( = I think he is a good comrade . )我信任他。

2 . disappointed / disappointing

两者都是形容词，与系动词 be 连用能构成复合谓语，be disappointed 意为“对……感到失望”，当宾语为“某人”时，其后跟介词 with；当宾语为“某事物”时，其后跟介词 with , at 或 about；当宾语为动词-ing 形式或 what 从句时，其后多用介词 about 或 at。例如：

I‘m disappointed with you . 我对你感到失望。

Are you very disappointed about / at losing the race ? 你比赛输了感到失望吗 ?

注意：disappointed 是表示感情的词，因此，主语多为表示人的名词。而 disappointing 意为“……令人感到失望”，主语多为表示某物或某种情况的词。例如：

The talk is disappointing . 这个报告令人失望。

It is very disappointing to heart that you are going to leave us soon . 听说你快要离开我们了，我们很失望。

disappointed 和 disappointing 也可以用作定语。如：a disappointed person 失望的人；disappointing news 令人失望的消息

3 . deep / deeply

两者都可以用作副词，这两个词不仅音形相似，而且都意为“深深地”。deep 多用于描写状态，常与介词 into 搭配。例如：

Radium , because of its powerful radioactive rays , can go deep into the human body . 镭具有很强的射线，能深入到人的肌体。

Father often works keep into the night . 父亲常常工作到深夜。

在某些短语中，常用副词 deep。如：drink deep 痛饮；be buried deep 深埋deeply 常和表示感情的动词、形容词或过去分词连用，相当于 very much。例如：

Marie was deeply shocked by Pierre’s death . 皮埃尔的逝世使玛丽极为震惊。

Since then the boy has been deeply interested in physics . 从那时起，这孩子对物理学发生了极浓厚的兴趣。

修饰表示具体的动作或状态的动词时，常用 deep，有时也可用 deeply。例如：

I know she would sleep deeply(或 deep)for about twelve hours . 我知道她会沉睡十个小时。

deep 还可以用作形容词和名词，deeply 则不能。例如：

This well is 30 metres deep . 这口井有30公尺深。

the deep of winter 隆冬

4 . cure / treat

cure 意为“治疗”，“治愈”，强调治好疾病的结果，使病人恢复健康，有时可指突然的、戏剧性的痊愈，它后面可以跟指疾病或指人的宾语，也可以在指人的宾语后面用 of 再加指疾病的宾语。例如：

Radium is still used today for curing cancer . 今天镭仍被用来治癌。

The doctor cured him of his stomach . 医生治好了他的胃痛病。

cure 还可解作“矫正”、“纠正”，借喻指消除社会某种不良现象或个人恶习等。例如：

The parents tried to cure the child of his bad habits . 父母亲尽力纠正这个孩子的不良习惯。

treat 意为“医治”，“治疗”，强调治疗的动作或医治的过程，不涉及治疗的结果。例如：

The doctors are trying their best to treat her with a new drug . 医生们试图用一种新药为她治病。

Which doctor is treating you for this trouble ? 哪位医生在给你治病 ? treat 还可解作“对待；看待”。例如：

The villagers treat the old people kindly . 村民们待老人很好。

Unit 2

1 . in charge of / in the charge of

两者在句中常用作表语和定语，in charge of 是“某人负责或管理什么”，含主动意思。例如：

Cook was to be in charge of this expedition as captain of the ship Endeavour . 库克将作为“奋进”号轮船的船长负责这次远航。

Who‘s in charge of the booking office ? 售票处是哪一位负责 ?

in the charge of 是指“某人或某物由别人管理或照顾”，含被动意思。例如：

The hospital is in the charge of Dr Green . 这医院由格林医生负责。

I have placed the papers in the charge of my bank manager . 我把文件交给我的银行经理保管。

2 . remember to do / remember doing

remember to do 表示“记住要去做(某事)”，to do 发生在 remember 之后。例如：

Please remember to lock the door . 请别忘了锁门。

You must remember to write to us when you get there . 你到达那里时，记住给我们写信。

remember doing 表示“记得曾做了(某事)”，doing 发生在 remember 之前。例如：

I remember seeing you somewhere in Beijing . 我记得在北京什么地方见到过你。

He remembered putting the key in the box under his bed . 他记得把钥匙放在床底下的箱子里了。

动词-ing 的一般式 doing 也可换用完成式 having done。例如：

I remember having asked her to write to us . 我记得曾经要她给我们写信。

注意：remember doing = remember to have done。如：I remember meeting him a year ago . ( = I remember to have met him a year ago . )我记得一年前见过他。

Unit 3

1 . elder / older

elder 和 older 均为形容词 old 的比较级形式，但用法不同。elder 只用于人，多指兄弟姐妹之间年龄长幼中的“长”，只用作定语，不用作表语，不能同 than 连用。例如：

He is my elder by several years . 他大我几岁。

Their know ledge , customs and memories were handed down by the elders of the race . 他们的知识、风俗习惯以及他们所怀念的事情都是由他们种族的长辈传下来的。

older 可用于人或物，用于人时，指实际年龄大小中的“大”，用于物时，意为“较旧的”，既可作定语和表语，也可同 than 连用。例如：

He is older than I . 他的年龄比我大。

Our classroom building is older than yours . 我们的教学大楼比你们的旧。

2 . argue / quarrel

argue 意为“争论，争吵，辩论”，着重就自己的看法或立场提出论证，和大家辨论，其后可接名词性从句。例如：

Mary and Mike argued in a law court . 玛丽与迈克在法庭上辩论。

He argued that the oral English class could be conducted in another way . 他论证英语口语课可以采用另一种方法进行。

We heard them arguing in the other room . They were getting very angry . 我们听见他们在另一个房间争论，他们都很生气。

quarrel 意为“争吵，吵架”，它表示一种因不同意或不喜欢而产生的强烈争吵，既可指言辞上的不和，也可指激烈的争吵。例如：

They had even quarrelled several times . 他们甚至吵过好几次了。

It’s no use quarrelling about it with me . 为这事和我吵没有用。

Unit 4

1 . order / book

order 意为“订货”，“定购”，常用作及物动词，还可以解作“点菜(饭、酒、饮料等)”，既可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词。例如：

I ordered some new clothes a month ago . 一个月前我定做了几件新衣服。

What drink shall we order ? 咱们点什么酒呢 ?

Have you ordered yet ? 你点过菜了吗 ?

book 意为“预定(戏票、车票等)”(ask and pay for a seat for the theatre , a journey etc . )。例如：

You are to go to the hotel where rooms have already been booked for you . 你们去旅馆，房间已经给你们订好了。

The tickets are all booked . 票全部预定光了。

2 . in a / one word , in words , in word / with words , with the / these / words in a / one word 意为“总之”(=in short)。例如：

In a word , hunger is a big problem in the world today . 总之，饥饿是当世界的一大问题。

In one word , I don‘t trust him . 一句话，我不信任他。

in words 意为“用语言(来表达)”。例如：

You don’t know how wonderful it is . It can‘t be described in words .

你不知道那有多么美妙，简直无法用语言来描述。

in word 和 with words 都解作“在口头上”。例如：

We should not work for the people in word . 我们不应该仅在口头上为人民而工作。

He has acknowledged his faults with words . 他已在口头上承认错误了。

with the / these words 意为“这样说着”，“说完这话就……”( after saying these words)。例如：

With the words , he left the room . 说完这些话，他离开了房间。

3 . result in / result from

result in 意为“导致”，一般说来，主语表示原因，介词 in 的宾语表示结果。例如：

They would not vote to lose their land wealth , even if it resulted in a fairer society . 他们是不会投票赞成让出土地和财产的，即使这样做的结果能导致一个较为公平的社会。

His careless driving resulted in the accident . 他粗心的驾驶导致了那起事故。

result from 意为“由于……而引起”，与 result in 相对，一般说来主语是结果，介词 from 后面的宾语为原因。试比较：

Success results from hard work . 成功来自努力。

Hard work results in success . 努力终归会成功。

Unit 5

1 . gift / present

两者都可以表示“礼物”的意思，有时两者可以通用。如：birthday gift (或 present)“生日礼物”。gift 着重于诚意和份量，一般指上级或同级所赠的礼物，用于表示好感、友谊或尊敬。

篇18：-书面表达精讲(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

1

该图表显示了某市的地铁使用情况的调查结果。请根据表格所示，简述该地铁站在一天中各时间段的客流量变化状况。文章开头已经给出。

注意：

1. 词数：100-120字

2. 可适当增加细节，以使行文连贯

3. 参考词汇：最高峰---pea； 图表---graph

Underground Station Passenger Numbers

The graph shows the fluctuation(起伏，波动) in the number of people at an underground station over the course of a day.

The busiest time of the day is in the morning. There is a sharp increase between 06:00 and 08:00, with 400 people using the station at 8 o'clock. After this the numbers drop quickly to less than 200 at 10 o'clock. Between 11 am and 3 pm the number rises, with about 300 people using the station.

In the afternoon, numbers decline/drop/fall, with less than 100 using the station at 4 pm. There is then a rapid rise to a peak of 380 at 6pm. After 7 pm, numbers fall sharply, with only a slight increase again at 8pm, dropping again after 9 pm.

In a word, the graph shows that the station is most crowded in the early morning and early evening periods.

2

下图的图表反映了至我市市民主要联络方式的变化。请仔细观察，写一篇题为 “Letters Give Way to Phone Calls” 的短文。

number of people in thousands

要求：1．描述图表。2．简要说明变化的原因。3．字数120左右。参考词汇：图表 diagram

Nowadays most people in our city do not communicate the way (or: as) they used to .As can be seen from the diagram ,the number of people who write letters has dropped from about 550 thousand in to150 thousand in . Meanwhile ,the number of those who contact others by phone has risen from 100 thousand in 1997 to 600 thousand in 2004.This diagram shows that letters have been giving way to phone calls.

In my opinion ,there are two main factors leading to this change .For one thing ,the widespread use of telephones makes it possible for people to change their traditional way of communicating ;for another ,letters can never be so convenient ,timely or direct as phone calls are in communication.

3

(04北京)某学校对中学生课余活动进行了调查，结果如下。请根据图表1提供的信息描述学生每天的课余活动，并针对图表2中任何一个数据中反映的情况写出你的一个看法。词数不少于60。

生词：图表chart

Chart 1 shows the daily average amount of time the students of the school spend on different after-class activities. The students put the most time－93 minutes－into their homework, and next in line is watching TV, which takes up 46 minutes. They put in about the same amount of time listening to music and working on the computer, 34 minutes and 30 minutes each. While 25 minutes is spent on sports, only 12 minutes goes into housework.

As is shown on Chart 2, only 10% of the time is taken up with sports activities. I think the school should encourage the students to do more exercise after class. This way, they may be healthier and more energetic.

4

假如你是高中三年级的学生张明，在学校组织了一项“有烦恼向谁说”的调查活动。请用英语给校报编辑写一封信，反映相关情况。内容包括：调查结果（如图所示）、持相应想法的理由及你对调查结果的看法。

注意：1．信的开头和结尾已经给出。

2．词数100词左右。

Dear Editor,

I am a Senior Three student．Recently we have carried out a survey-“To whom do you go when in trouble?” The main findings are as follows．

61% of the students surveyed select friends or schoolmates as their ideal listeners when they have trouble and want to confide, the reason of which is that they are in the same age group and have a better understanding of each other．Another 22% choose teachers and parents to talk to．They suggest that teachers and parents are rich in life and educational experiences．Nevertheless, there are also 17% who don’t share their troubles at all．They say that their troubles are none of others’ business．Others find it hard to converse with others．

(It is not easy to reach definite conclusions based on such a small example．However, some general comments can be made．) It seems clear from the response that some students lack communication with others and teachers and parents need to play a more important role in their lives．

Yours sincerely,

Zhang Ming

开头句：1) From the chart/graph/table/diagram /picture, we can see that….

2) As is shown in the chart/graph/table/ diagram /picture,…..

3) As we can see from the chart/graph/table/ diagram/ picture,……

5

.请按照下面所给的2幅图画的提示和所提供的主题句，用英文写一篇题为“Changes in My Village”的短文。

1． 开头已为你写好。3．词汇：砖厂 brickyard

In the pas

now

Changes in My village

Great changes have taken place in my village. Ten years ago, the small and low houses of my village lay on the north of a lake. They produced much waste. As a result, the lake was seriously polluted. To the west of the village was a sandy field, which was the source of much dust whenever wind was blowing. Worse still, a brickyard on the southwest side of the lake used up a great deal of good soil.

Now the poor houses have been replaced by green trees and the brickyard by tall buildings, The sandy field that the villagers used to plough has been covered with fruit trees. On the lake, now clean and clear, the villagers often spend their spare time boating and fishing.

(In a word, my village has become a modernized and green one.) We are extremely happy about the changes in our village.

5

下面的图画反映的是少数中学生的一些不良习惯和违背社会公德的行为。请仔细观察自己命题写一篇英语短文，描写下述现象（可适当发挥），并就此谈谈自己的看法。

Nowadays some students have got into bad habits. In our daily life we can often see them throw rubbish here and there. Some don’t bother to turn off the taps after using running water and sometimes they leave the lights on when they are out. Some even say very dirty words in public, which has a bad effect on the others.

It is bad manners to behave so. I hope everyone will obey the general rules in school. Never throw waste anywhere and keep the ground clean. We should try to save our running water and electricity. Above all, we should be polite to others. If we can give up those bad habits, life will be much better.

6

. 假如你是中学生李涛，最近发现一些同学经常到学校附近的网吧（cyber cafe）。几天前，你也去了一次，发现了许多不良现象，请根据下面四幅图所示内容，给某报社会编辑写一封信，发表看法并提出建议。

注意：1、词数：100左右 2、开头已经给出。

参考词汇：因特网Internet 聊天chat 冲浪surf 在线的 online

I’m a middle – school student named Li Tao. I’m writing to tell you something. Recently I’ve noticed that many of my schoolmates often go to the cyber cafes near our school. The other day, I went there, too. I was surprised to see them playing computer games, seeing movies or chatting. Some of them were even talking about love affairs on line.

In my opinion, a cyber café should be a place where we can find much useful information. Internet should be a window to the outside world rather than a place for games. Internet is good if we make good use of it. Otherwise, it will do us great harm. So the local government should take measures to make sure of the safety of us students in cyber cafes.

Yours,

Li Tao

7

书面表达（满分25分）

眼下，街头巷议，人们的热门话题总离不开“三贵”：买房贵、上学贵、看病贵。请根据下面图画，写一篇英语短文，简要说明图画中所表达的内容，重点阐述这种现象所带来的后果和你的观点。题目自拟。

注意：1. 短文应包括图中所提供的主要信息，并做适当发挥，使短文内容连贯、完整；

2. 词数：120左右。

It’s Time to Reduce Loads

Nowadays it is often talked about that there are three things that people can’t afford．It is expensive to buy houses, to pay for the children’s education and to see the doctor. It is really true about this. As is shown in the picture, some people are burdened with these high expenses all their lives. Some people even get into heavy debt even though they work hard and make every effort to earn money or save every coin. Some people have to say good-bye to the doctor because of lack of money or they have a heavy debt load.

In my opinion, the government should build up a perfect system to meet the basic need of living. The expense on houses, tuition and medicine should be cut down so that everyone can enjoy a better life.

8

书面表达：（满分25分）

目前医疗费不断攀升，有人因付不起昂贵的医疗费而只好忍受疾病的折磨。人们强烈呼吁政府应当建立有效的医疗保障体制。请根据下面图画，以“Health Care”为题写一篇短文，简要说明图画中所表达的内容，重点阐述这种现象所带来的后果和你的观点。

注意：1. 短文应包括图中所提供的主要信息，并做适当发挥，使短文内容连贯、完整；

2. 词数：120左右。

Health Care

From the picture, we can see that the old man was suffering from heart trouble. He had to go to hospital for medical care. When he saw the medical bill from the hospital, he was so shocked that he couldn’t stand on his feet. It was beyond what he could afford． It’s really another heart attack for him.

At present, many people can’t afford heavy medical fees. Because of this, they may get into deep debt in order to get proper medical care or have to bear the pain of diseases. Worse still, some have to wait for the last day of their life.

We strongly call for the medical expenses to be reduced． The government should build up a favorable medical system. Everyone could enjoy their life as long as possible.

9

假设你叫李华，你班同学参加了“二十一世纪中学生英文报”组织的一场讨论。讨论的主题是：城市内是否可以豢养宠物（狗和猫）。请你根据下表所提供的信息，给报社投稿，介绍讨论情况，并说明自己的观点或建议。注意：.词数100左右。

反对饲养宠物的同学认为 支持饲养宠物的同学认为

1． 造成环境污染

2． 吵闹声，甚至伤人 1． 安慰孤寡老人

2． 人与动物和谐相处，增添生活情趣

模板1) Recently we have had a heated discussion on whether people should…

2) Some students think it's a good idea to…

3) Besides, … make….

4) On the contrary, … are against the idea.

5) In their opinions, if … , it is bad for …

6) What is worse, … make … and…

7) I like … , so I don't think it's bad to …

8) But we must take some measures to…

Recently we have had a heated discussion on whether people should keep pets at home in cities.

Some students think it's a good idea to keep pets because many old people who live alone at home can get some comfort from pets. Besides, getting along well with animals will make our life interesting.

On the contrary, the other students are against the idea. In their opinions, if too many people keep pets at home, it is bad for the environment. What is worse, pets may make too much noise and even attack people.

I like animals, so I don't think it's bad to keep pets at home. But we must take some measures to prevent them from polluting our environment.

(1). 用于句首提出论题或现象的句型

②…has been playing an increasingly important role in our daily life .

③Nowadays there is a growing concern for …

④Nowadays it is common to hear /see …

⑩Nowadays … has become a problem we have to face .

①Recently , …has become the focus of the society .

⑥Nowadays more and more people are beginning to be aware of the seriousness of …

(2). 表示看法

1）People have（take，adopt，assume）different attitudes towards sth．

2）People have different opinions on this problem．

3）People take different views of（on）the question．

4）Some people believe that．．．Others argue that．．．

例如： People have different attitudes towards failure．Some believe that failure leads to success．Every failure they experience translates into a greater chance of success at their renewed endeavor．However，others are easily discouraged by failures and put themselves into the category of losers．

（3）用于比较、阐述不同观点的常用句型

②There are different opinions among people … Some believe … Others , however , hold a different idea.

③Some people claim that … Others , however , disagree with it .

④Some people believe … Others maintain … Still others claim …

⑤Some people suggest … Others , however , hold the opposite opinion .

⑥On one hand , people tend to … On the other hand , they feel …

1．表示原因

1）There are three reasons for this．

例如： There are three reasons for the changes that have taken place in our life．Firstly，people’s living standard has been greatly improved．Secondly，most people are well paid， and they can afford what they need or like．Last but not least，more and more people prefer to enjoy

modern life．

注：如考生写第一个句子没有把握，可将其改写成两个句子。

如：Great changes have taken place in our life． There are three reasons for this．

这样写可以避免套用中的表达失误。

（6）用于陈述个人观点/想法的常用句型或表示结论

②In my opinion , we should attack more importance to …

③As for my own idea about … I believe …

⑤Personally , I prefer …

⑥In my view , both sides are partly right in that …

⑦But for me , I would rather …

⑨In conclusion , I support the statement that …

1）In short，it can be said that ．．．

2）It may be briefly summed up as follows．

3）From what has been mentioned above，we can come to the conclusion that ．．．

例如：From what has been mentioned above，we can come to the conclusion that examination is necessary，however， its method should be improved．

注：例句1可用于任何一个段落的结论句；例句3则多用文章结论段的第一句。

（8）用于结尾的常用句型

①From what has been discussed / mentioned above , we may conclude that …

②Therefore , it is not difficult to draw / come to the conclusion that …

③It is high time that something was done about …

⑦It is clear , therefore , that …

⑨It is essential that effective measures (should) be taken to …

⑩From what has been discussed above , we may reasonably arrive at the conclusion that …

⑾ In conclusion ,the most important is …

⑿ On the whole , it is high time that every one …

⒀ As a result , we should take some effective steps to …

⒁ Judging by the figures / statistics , it is not difficult to see that …

⒂ Only in this way, can the problem be really solved.

(16)Only when everybody can do so will our world become more and more beautiful.

10

面对不断升温的中学生”出国热"，人们对此有不同的看法。请你以Studying Abroad为题，根据下面提供的信息，谈谈自己的看法。 注意: 字数120左右。参考词汇：mediator 媒介，中间人

Advantages Disadvantages

1. 传播各个民族间的不同文化。

2. 拓宽视野，学习国外先进的科学技术。

3. 良好的语言环境，更有利于语言学习。 1. 年纪偏小，自理能力差。

2. 远离父母，孤独，想家。

3. 生活、学习费用高。

4. 缺乏生活经验，易受不良人或物的影响，甚至走上犯罪道路。

模板1) In recent years, … has become more and more popular with…

2) Tens of thousands of…

3) In my opinion, there are many advantages to…

4) First, … Second, … Third, …

5) However, there are also some disadvantages.

6) … too … to …

7) Being … can make…

8) Also, of course it’s … than…

9) What’s worse, without… it’s easy for them to…

10) In a word, think it over before…

In recent years, studying abroad has become more and more popular with middle school students. Tens of thousands of Chinese middle school students have gone abroad.

In my opinion, there are many advantages to attending school abroad. First, students who have studied abroad can act as mediator between people of different cultures. Second, there is so much to learn about science and technology in foreign countries. Third, we can learn foreign languages more quickly.

However, there are also some disadvantages. Many students are too young to take care of themselves. Being far away home can make you feel lonely and home sick. Also, of course it’s more expensive abroad than at home. What’s worse, without any experience of living abroad, it’s easy for them to make bad friends and be influenced to do stupid things.

In a word, think it over before you make your decision.

2．表示好处

1）It has the following advantages．

3．表示坏处

1）It has more disadvantages than advantages．

2) As we all know, every coin has two sides. It can also be harmful to….

一二三原则

领导讲话总是第一部分、第一点、第二点、第三点、第二部分、第一点… 如此罗嗦。可毕竟还是条理清楚。考官们看文章也必然要通过这些关键性的“标签”来判定你的文章是否结构清楚，条理自然。破解方法很简单，只要把下面任何一组的词汇加入到你的几个要点前就清楚了。

1）first, second, third, last（不推荐，原因：俗）

2）firstly, secondly, thirdly, finally（不推荐，原因：俗）

3）the first, the second, the third, the last（不推荐，原因：俗）

4）in the first place, in the second place, in the third place, lastly（不推荐，原因：俗）

5）to begin with, then, furthermore, finally（强烈推荐）

6）to start with, next, in addition, finally（强烈推荐）

7）first and foremost, besides, last but not least（强烈推荐）

8）most important of all, moreover, finally

9）on the one hand, on the other hand（适用于两点的情况）

10）for one thing, for another thing（适用于两点的情况）

＂There be＂结构

考生病句：

1. There are many people like to go to the movies.

2. There are different kinds of vegetables can be bought on the market by people.

正确表达：

1. There are many people who like to go to the movies.

2. There are different kinds of vegetables that people can buy on the market.

这两个例句的错误比较有普遍性，因为在历次考试中有不少考生不能正确运用there be这一最常用的句式。在这种结构中，there是引导词，没有实际意义。be在句中作谓语，有时态和数的变化。

例如：

1. There was no school in the village at that time. (=there was not a school...)

注意：在否定句中，否定词用no，也可用not a或not any。not a后接单数名词，not a 后接复数名词，no后面的名词单复数都可以。

2. There is not a moment to be lost.

3. There are many people rushing into the cities every year.

4. There are many things we can do to prevent traffic accidents.

5. There is no use holding back the wheel of history.

从以上例句还可看出，句中的主语后面可接多种修饰语，如介词短语、不定式短语、定语从句、分词短语等等。这无疑使该结构增加了表现力，使句子表达内容更加丰富。 在运用这一结构时，考生最容易犯的错误是在there be之后又用了一个动词作谓语，使句子结构出现严重错误。这里列举的考生的典型错误均属这种情况，对此我们在写作中要格外注意。

1) These things show that many students lack the sense of environmental awareness. （主题句）In my opinion, students should be educated to be aware of the importance of protecting the environment. At the same time, students can do some small things, such as turning off the lights, collecting used things for recycling and saving water. Always remember that it is everyone’s duty to protect the environment. Only when all the students are aware of that can we build a green school.

2) As we all can see,the phenomenon mentioned above has become a serious social problem we have to face.If we let it continue,it will do more harm to our society.So,in my opinion,it is high time that we took action together to solve this problem.Only when everybody can do so will we probably enjoy a better life.

11

假定你叫张华，你的同学李明即将去上海学习。现由你写一封便函给你们的朋友Jim，约他聚会。内容要点如下：

（1）.聚会时间：本星期五下午3点30分；

（2）.聚会地点：东风路225号，李明家。

（3）.按下图所画路线告诉Jim怎样去李明家。

注意：

（1）便函用英语写，并注明便函的时间：4月9日；

（2）内容包括说明部分和要点；

（3）字数：80－120

April 9th,

Dear Jim,

Our friend Li Ming will leave for Shanghai to study. So we are going to have a get-together at 3:30 this Friday afternoon. He lives at No.225 Dongfeng Street. It is not very difficult to find your way to his home. Take a No.2 bus, the stop of which is on the left of your university, and get off at the second crossing. There is a cinema across the street. Turn right at the corner, and you will find Dongfeng Street. Li Ming’s home is 200 yards down the street on the right. There is a post office opposite to Li Ming’s home.

Yours,

Zhang Hua

12

假如你是李明，你收到了美国朋友Robin的来信，他在信中说他将于6月3日和他妹妹到北京来看望你，对此你表示高兴和欢迎。但你碰巧要去珠海出席一个会议，无法接他们。为此，你向Robin深表歉意并在信中告诉他从机场到你家如何走，说明你家在403室，你母亲到时会在家中迎候他们，最后告诉他们你将于6月5日回京。

要求：1．短文必须包括文字说明的所有重点。

2．短文必须按图中所示的交通路线和交

通方式说明。

3．书信格式正确。

4．字数：100字左右。

One possible version:

May 25,2004

Dear Robin,

I'm very glad to learn from your letter that you and your sister will come to Beijing and visit me on June 3rd. But I'm terribly sorry that I can't meet you because I have to attend a meeting in Zhuhai. Now let me tell you the way to my house.

When you get out of the airport, you can take Bus 359 to Dongzhimen. Walk across the flyover to the west until you see a bookstore on your right. Turn left there and go straight ahead. Then you can see a bank, and then a cinema on your left. The apartment building I live in is next to the cinema. Find Room 403 and my mother will be meeting you at home.

I'll be back on June 5th.

Best regards to you all.

Yours truly,

Li Ming

13

下面是光明中学的示意图。请根据示意图和图后的说明写一篇100词左右的短文，登到该中学的网页上。

方位指路、图表说明 地图/路线图的书面表达

1.Our school is located at(位于) the foot of a green hill.

2.In front of the school is a beautiful garden with a library on its left and a laboratory on its right.

3.Behind the garden is the classroom building.

4.At the back of the school are the students’ dormitory and the dinning-hall, in front of which lies the large sports field.

5.The teacher’s dormitory stands between A and B.

6.It is not very difficult to find your way from the Friendship Hotel to the station.

7.When you get out of the hotel, turn left and walk down the street until you see the traffic lights.

8.Turn right at the third crossing/turning, and you will see a post office at the corner. The museum is next/opposite to it.

9.Go straight ahead until you get to the end of the street.

10.Please get across the bridge and go eastward.

11.No.25 Bus will take you right there.

12.It will take you about 10 minutes to get there.

13.It’s about 10 minutes’ walk /ride from here.

14.The flat is made up of six rooms. When you go in , you’ll first see a large hall with a kitchen and a bathroom. The door on your left leads you to our living-room. Next to the door against the wall there is a sofa, in which we sit to watch TV every evening. On the opposite side stands a color TV set. On your left lies a set of bookcases, with all kinds of books in it.

篇19：reading The Trick 教案 unit 10 the trick(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

The Trick

I. Type of the text: Reading

II.Teaching aims and demands

i. Language ability

a.Enable the students to grasp the use of the following words :pause, in a flash, break into, calm, hold out, break off, fear ,flight.

b. Enable the students to understand these difficult sentences:

1.He had had a sudden thought.

2.He appeared calm, but inside his heart was beating wildly with fear.

3.He might be attacked and have his case stolen from him.

4.The moment he entered the room, Bill fixed the chain across the

door.

5.I prefer someone large, he thought to himself.

ii. Communication ability

a. Enable the students to paraphrase the sentences in their own words.

b. Enable the students to retell how Bill Banks escaped from being followed successfully with the picture as a guide.

c. Enable the students to say something about how to escape if they are followed .

III. Difficult points

a. To understand the sentences .

b. To guess out the motive .

c. To draw the picture of the curious hotel rooms after reading the text.

d. To imagine how Bill Banks escaped.

IV. Important points

a. To guess out the motive because the text is a detective story. It’s important to know why people do this or that.

b. To draw the picture of the curious hotel rooms because it’s where the trick lies.

V.Teaching tool: Multi-media

VI.Teaching method: audio-video approach, communication method etc.

VII.Teaching process

一.Lead in

1. Listen to a song: Golden eyes

2. The picture of James Bond

二.New words:

Match the left with the right.

1. pause A. enter by force

2. in a flash B. free from excitement

3.break into C. stop for while

4.calm D. very quickly ;suddenly or soon

5.hold out E. flying through the air ;stairs between two landings

6.break off F. be very much afraid

7.fear G. cause to separate

8flight H. to stretch out a part of one's body to the limit

三.Listening

1. Why was Bill worried?

2. Where had Bill planned to travel to?

3. From which room did Bill escape?

四.Fast reading

True or false:

1. Bill Banks discovered that two men were following him on his way to the airport.

2. The two men meant to catch him and steal his money.

3. Bill went to Pyramid Hotel and spent a night there.

4. Bill felt safe when he saw two police officers outside the entrance of the hotel.

5. Bill called his friend Mick asked him to go to Japan right away instead of himself.

6. As soon as Bill saw Mick arriving at the hotel , he went his room.

7. Bill was satisfied to have Room 511.

8. The hotel was curious , because Bill could escape from the window.

五. careful reading

Put the sentences into the correct order.

1.Bill picked up a computer program from a research station, planning to take it to Japan.

2. Two men were watching him from outside the hotel.

3. Two men were following him .

4. He took a taxi and arrived at Pyramid Hotel.

5. They went up to his room.

6. He asked someone to show him to his room when he saw Mick

7. Two men followed him to the hotel in a taxi.

8. The two men forced open the door of Room 411 and found the room was empty.

9. He made a telephone call to Mick and told him what to do .

10. Mick was waiting at the airport, wondering whether Bill had managed to escape.

六. paraphrase

1.He had had a sudden thought. He thought of something suddenly. 2.He appeared calm, but inside his heart was beating wildly with fear. On the outside he appeared calm, but on the inside his heart was beating fast because he was afraid. eg: He was trembling (颤抖)with cold. Hearing the news ,we jumped with joy. 3.I'd prefer someone large ,he thought to himself. I'd prefer a person strong enough to protect me.

4.He might be attacked and have his case stolen from him. eg: I intended to have my daughter educated(educate) in England. I'm not going to have you mixed up (mix up) with this sort of business.

5.The moment he entered the room,Bill fixed the chain across the door. As soon as he entered the room,Bill...... Immediately Hardly had he entered the room,Bill....... No sooner

七. discussion

1. Guess: ①Bill stopped in front of the first shop to see whether he was still followed. ②Bill didn't go up to his room immediately because he was afraid that the men might attack him or break into his room. ③Bill asked Mick not to say his name aloud because the men might hear the name and would realize they were working together. ④Bill asked Mick not to say anything during the second phone call because the men might hear something.

2. Imagine : ①What instructions could Bill probably give Mick in the second call? Go up to Room511. ②How is the curious hotel rooms like? Draw them out.

③How do you think Bill finally escaped from the hotel?

八.Oral practice

Suppose you are Bill Banks ,tell us how you escape when you find yourself being followed in the street.

九. Enjoyment

Enjoy a part of the film Golden Eye

十. Homework

Prepare a riddle or a detective story and tell it to your classmates next period.

江苏省梅村高级中学

吕萍

．10．22

篇20：一节高三作文练习讲评课(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)

第一节:情景作文(满分20分)

某英文报“健康生活”栏目正在讨论有关健康食品、体育锻炼与少年儿童肥胖的问题。下面六幅图画是李明一年中的变化，请根据李明的情况写一篇短文。

注意：1．词数不少于60。 2．短文的开头已给出。

提示词语：junk food好吃但不利于健康的食品 snacks各种零食

A healthy diet and regular exercise may help to prevent obesity(肥胖) among children. Take Li Ming for example.

Li Ming used to be a healthy boy, but

第二节:开放作文(满分15分)

根据下面英文提示写一篇短文，词数不少于50。

Traffic jams are a very serious problem in Beijing. The streets are full of cars,buses, and bikes almost every day. To make matters worse, some people do not follow the traffic rules.

Suppose you are discussing this problem in your English class. Please make two or three suggestions on how to improve the traffic in Beijing.

2005北京春季考试试题（作文评析）

情景作文（读黑体字，想想如何写更恰当）

1.A healthy diet and regular exercise may help to prevent obesity among children. Take Li Ming for example.

Li Ming used to be a healthy boy, but he has become a fat boy sine last year, or in 2003.Li Ming ate a lot of junk food on July, 2003. The next month, he went on to eat all kinds of snacks and he even watched TV while ate those snacks. On December, Li Ming became too fat to go the steps easily. In 2004, Li Ming changed his life habits. He ate normal food every day. Besides these, he took part in many sports, such as football, swimming, running and skating. To be surprised, now Li Ming succeeds in preventing obesity and he becomes a healthy boy again. 13

…2..but he didn’t care about his diet. In the year 2003, he eat luck food and snacks from July to December . So he became obesity . When he found the fact that he was so fat , he began to limit himself . He had a healthy diet and did regular exercise in the next year . After a while , he turn back the healthy and thin body before .It tells us that a healthy diet and regular exercise may help to prevent obesity among children . (12)

（79 words）字数少，时态应该一致。

3.Li Ming used to be a healthy boy , but big changes had taken place in 2003. During the year , Li Ming was addicted in junk food , which tastes good but does harm to body . In the summer holiday, he not only ate a lot of junk food , but also didn’t take exercise . As a result, he soon became fat over the three months . In 2004, however, Li Ming realized that the fat body and had habits had brought a lot of trouble to him , so he decided to change it . He started to eat regularly and do exercise. For example , playing football afterschool , running in the morning , swimming in the summer and skating in the winter .With his effort , he had a good health again .

This story told us that : If you want to have a strong body , a good habit of eating and doing exercise is the first demand. (16.)

4. He became very fat in 2003. Let’s have a look at his daily life. From June to December he often eat a lot of junk food which taste good but is very bad for health. What’s more, he usually watched TV on sofa with eating snacks and went to sleep after watching TV. As the bad habit developing, he was more and more fat. However, what was the most surprised that he lost a lot and very healthy in 2004.The sercert of it is close to his regular diet and a plenty of exercise, such as, playing football, swimming, running, skating and so on. So he is happy to go to school how. (15)

5.Li Ming used to be a healthy boy, but great changes have taken place in 2003 and 2004. The meal Li Ming ate every day was full of a lot of and different junk food which was bad for health. What’s more, he watched TV lying on the sofa and eating snacks. As a result, his weight went up day after day, he even had difficulties in climbing the stairs. This made Li Ming so sad that he decided to get a new beginning in 2004. Instead of junk food and snacks, Li Ming ate the healthy diet and took more exercises such as football, swimming, skating and running. At fast, he became as healthy as before, healthy diet and regular exercise helped him a lot. (17)

6.Li Ming used to be a healthy boy , but when he became enjoying eat junk food and snacks . Things became more and more terrible . He ate fast food and snacks every day and watched TV lying on the sofa. For about two months, he was so fat that he could hardly clamb the steps . Because of this, he decided to lose weight, he didn’t eat fast food any more and liked eating vegetables and fruits. He took exercises every day , such as playing football .swimming .running .skating and so on .（标点符号） Finally , he was succeed , he became healthy and strong .16

开放作文（读黑体字，想想如何写更恰当）

1.The discussing is depends on the question. In my opinion, people in Beijing should often take buses instead private cars. Then, I suggest that people there should follow the traffic rules in order to keep the traffic well. What’s more, we should think something more about others. In all, traffic relates to everyone and we should keep the traffic well. 10

2.I have three suggestions on how to improve the traffic in Beijing. First, I think our country should build more wild roads because there are so a few roads that the strects are full of cars, buses and bikes. Second, our country should limit the numbers of the cars and buses and they are pollution. The last one, our country can increase the number of the traffic policeman to make people follow the traffic rules. I think the three suggestions are the first we can do. 13

3.Our class hare a heated discussion about how to improve the traffic in Beijing. We had made two suggestion; One, the government should build more road for cars and bikes. If can make the matter better than before. Two, making people to follow the traffic rules, it must be raised in education. There are many means I believe the traffic jams should be solved. 11

4.First, we can enwide the old streets and build more new roads. And then, we can have the people who do not follow the traffic rules see the film in which many people lost their life because of breaking traffic rules. Finally, we should learn more about the traffic rules to make Beijing’s traffic better. (10)

5.First of all, everyone should abbey the traffic rules. If we follow the rules, less accidents will happen and more time will be saved on the road. Then, the government should plan to build more streets and widen the roads. There are more people than before, so the facdities should also be improved. As students, we should do first and set a modle to others. 11

6.I think we can decrease the number of the cars owned personality .. Then , make the road wider than before . (4) (字数不够，语言贫乏，衔接性差)

7.Traffic jams are a very serious problems in Beijing . One reason is that some people don’t follow the traffic rules . It is terrible . We can let them have a lesson about the harm of the traffic jams. Maybe they will realized the disadvantages of not following the rules.

The streets are full of cars , buses and bikes every day . Maybe the government can persuade citizens to walk to schools or jobs.

(5) 没有审清题目，重点不是原因而是解决方法。（答非所问）

8.I think our students should join the line to improve the traffic in Beijing. First, we should help policeman to built some traffic jams. Second, when we see some old people is walking across a road, we should help them to pass it. If we have enough ablitives, we should help policeman to wave the trafficts. 3分(跑题作文)

9.First of all, the government must improve the people’s knowledge of traffic rules by teaching and having an examination. This is the foundation. Second , The most important thing is that the people should obey the traffic rules and set up more traffic lights and bridge on the road. We should pay attention to safety. Finally we hope that the company should change the time of going to work and going home to avoid the rush hours. 12

10.I think that the government should make people know the knowledge of traffic and tell them to go to work by bus or by bike as possible. And They should build more roads for the cars . The most important thing is : if all the people follow the traffic rules , it will not have traffic jams. 12

注意下列单词的拼写，拿起笔来重新写

1．作为什么结果 2、限制 3、增加体重 4、习惯 5现代的6、方便的 7、解决 8、躺，（过去时，过去分词）9、放 10、重要的11、代替 12进行体育锻炼 13、吃（过去式，过去分词）14、越来越胖 15 八月 16、食物 17、私人的

17游泳 18.意识到 19幸运的 20 决定去做什么

21、健康的名词和形容词 traffic jams junk ---luck

★ 新课标高二英语教学计划

★ 高三英语教学计划

★ 高三英语老师教学的工作总结

★ 高三英语教师工作计划总结

★ 高三英语教师教学总结

★ 高三老师教学计划

★ 高一英语学科教学计划

★ 新学期教学计划英语

★ 高三英语教师个人计划

★ 高三学期教师教学个人工作总结

《高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计).doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便收藏和打印

推荐度：

点击下载文档

【高三专项复习--写作(新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)（整理20篇）】相关文章：

老师教学计划2023-02-25

英语学科教学计划2022-07-26

备考的发言稿2023-01-31

高三复习教学工作计划2024-01-23

高考备考工作总结2023-02-11

英语老师个人教学工作总结2023-08-04

小学英语学科教学计划2023-05-23

高中语文教学新学期工作计划范本2023-09-08

高三生物教师教学计划精选合集2023-09-16

高三生物教学计划2023-09-17